summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/47464-t/47464-t.tex
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-14 19:05:54 -0700
committerRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-14 19:05:54 -0700
commit9638e58f45d4e1a4277028e9bcf9651e334bec4f (patch)
tree91c91aeacb0f42c7a34134d1925ba624c6363f2b /47464-t/47464-t.tex
initial commit of ebook 47464HEADmain
Diffstat (limited to '47464-t/47464-t.tex')
-rw-r--r--47464-t/47464-t.tex6910
1 files changed, 6910 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/47464-t/47464-t.tex b/47464-t/47464-t.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f79a93e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/47464-t/47464-t.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,6910 @@
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %
+% %
+% The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Theory of Spectra and Atomic %
+% Constitution, by Niels (Niels Henrik David) Bohr %
+% %
+% This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
+% other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions %
+% whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
+% the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at %
+% www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
+% to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.
+% %
+% %
+% %
+% Title: The Theory of Spectra and Atomic Constitution %
+% Three Essays %
+% %
+% Author: Niels (Niels Henrik David) Bohr %
+% %
+% Release Date: November 26, 2014 [EBook #47464] %
+% Most recently updated: June 11, 2021 %
+% %
+% Language: English %
+% %
+% Character set encoding: UTF-8 %
+% %
+% *** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THEORY OF SPECTRA *** %
+% %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %
+
+\def\ebook{47464}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% %%
+%% Packages and substitutions: %%
+%% %%
+%% book: Required. %%
+%% inputenc: Latin-1 text encoding. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% ifthen: Logical conditionals. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% amsmath: AMS mathematics enhancements. Required. %%
+%% amssymb: Additional mathematical symbols. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% alltt: Fixed-width font environment. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% indentfirst: Indent first paragraph of each section. Optional. %%
+%% array: Array enhancements. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% footmisc: Start footnote numbering on each page. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% graphicx: Standard interface for graphics inclusion. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% calc: Length calculations. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% fancyhdr: Enhanced running headers and footers. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% geometry: Enhanced page layout package. Required. %%
+%% hyperref: Hypertext embellishments for pdf output. Required. %%
+%% %%
+%% %%
+%% Producer's Comments: %%
+%% %%
+%% OCR text for this ebook was obtained on Nov. 21, 2014, from %%
+%% http://www.archive.org/details/theoryofspectraa00bohr. %%
+%% %%
+%% Minor changes to the original are noted in this file in two %%
+%% ways: %%
+%% 1. \Chg{}{} and \Add{} for modernization and consistency: %%
+%% * "excentric" modernized to "eccentric". %%
+%% * "can not" uniformized to "cannot". %%
+%% * "ultra-violet" and "infra-red" hyphenated uniformly. %%
+%% %%
+%% 2. [** TN: Note]s for other remarks. %%
+%% %%
+%% Compilation Flags: %%
+%% %%
+%% The following behavior may be controlled by a boolean flag. %%
+%% %%
+%% ForPrinting (false by default): %%
+%% If false, compile a screen optimized file (one-sided layout, %%
+%% blue hyperlinks). If true, print-optimized PDF file: Larger %%
+%% text block, two-sided layout, black hyperlinks. %%
+%% %%
+%% %%
+%% PDF pages: 209 (if ForPrinting set to false) %%
+%% PDF page size: 4.5 x 6.5" (non-standard) %%
+%% %%
+%% Summary of log file: %%
+%% * Two underfull hboxes. (No visual problems.) %%
+%% %%
+%% Compile History: %%
+%% %%
+%% November, 2014: (Andrew D. Hwang) %%
+%% texlive2012, GNU/Linux %%
+%% %%
+%% Command block: %%
+%% %%
+%% pdflatex x4 %%
+%% %%
+%% %%
+%% November 2014: pglatex. %%
+%% Compile this project with: %%
+%% pdflatex 47464-t.tex ..... FOUR times %%
+%% %%
+%% pdfTeX, Version 3.1415926-2.5-1.40.14 (TeX Live 2013/Debian) %%
+%% %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[12pt]{book}[2005/09/16]
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PACKAGES %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}[2006/05/05]
+
+\usepackage{ifthen}[2001/05/26] %% Logical conditionals
+
+\usepackage{amsmath}[2000/07/18] %% Displayed equations
+\usepackage{amssymb}[2002/01/22] %% and additional symbols
+
+\usepackage{alltt}[1997/06/16] %% boilerplate, credits, license
+
+\IfFileExists{indentfirst.sty}{%
+ \usepackage{indentfirst}[1995/11/23]
+}{}
+
+\usepackage{array}[2008/09/09]
+
+\usepackage[perpage,symbol]{footmisc}[2005/03/17]
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}[1999/02/16]%% For diagrams
+
+\usepackage{calc}[2005/08/06]
+
+\usepackage{fancyhdr} %% For running heads
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%% Interlude: Set up PRINTING (default) or SCREEN VIEWING %%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% ForPrinting=true false (default)
+% Asymmetric margins Symmetric margins
+% 1 : 1.6 text block aspect ratio 3 : 4 text block aspect ratio
+% Black hyperlinks Blue hyperlinks
+% Start major marker pages recto No blank verso pages
+%
+\newboolean{ForPrinting}
+
+%% UNCOMMENT the next line for a PRINT-OPTIMIZED VERSION of the text %%
+%\setboolean{ForPrinting}{true}
+
+%% Initialize values to ForPrinting=false
+\newcommand{\Margins}{hmarginratio=1:1} % Symmetric margins
+\newcommand{\HLinkColor}{blue} % Hyperlink color
+\newcommand{\PDFPageLayout}{SinglePage}
+\newcommand{\TransNote}{Transcriber's Note}
+\newcommand{\TransNoteCommon}{%
+ The camera-quality files for this public-domain ebook may be
+ downloaded \textit{gratis} at
+ \begin{center}
+ \texttt{www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/\ebook}.
+ \end{center}
+
+ This ebook was produced using scanned images and OCR text generously
+ provided by the Brandeis University Library through the Internet Archive.
+ \bigskip
+
+ Minor typographical corrections and presentational changes have been
+ made without comment.
+ \bigskip
+}
+
+\newcommand{\TransNoteText}{%
+ \TransNoteCommon
+
+ This PDF file is optimized for screen viewing, but may be recompiled
+ for printing. Please consult the preamble of the \LaTeX\ source file
+ for instructions and other particulars.
+}
+%% Re-set if ForPrinting=true
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{ForPrinting}}{%
+ \renewcommand{\Margins}{hmarginratio=2:3} % Asymmetric margins
+ \renewcommand{\HLinkColor}{black} % Hyperlink color
+ \renewcommand{\PDFPageLayout}{TwoPageRight}
+ \renewcommand{\TransNote}{Transcriber's Note}
+ \renewcommand{\TransNoteText}{%
+ \TransNoteCommon
+
+ This PDF file is optimized for printing, but may be recompiled for
+ screen viewing. Please consult the preamble of the \LaTeX\ source
+ file for instructions and other particulars.
+ }
+}{% If ForPrinting=false, don't skip to recto
+ \renewcommand{\cleardoublepage}{\clearpage}
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%% End of PRINTING/SCREEN VIEWING code; back to packages %%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{ForPrinting}}{%
+ \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
+ \setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
+% 1:1.6
+ \usepackage[body={5in,8in},\Margins]{geometry}[2002/07/08]
+}{%
+ \setlength{\paperwidth}{4.5in}%
+ \setlength{\paperheight}{6.5in}%
+ \raggedbottom
+% 3:4
+ \usepackage[body={4.25in,5.6in},\Margins,includeheadfoot]{geometry}[2002/07/08]
+}
+
+\providecommand{\ebook}{00000} % Overridden during white-washing
+\usepackage[pdftex,
+ hyperfootnotes=false,
+ pdfauthor={Niels Henrik David Bohr},
+ pdftitle={The Project Gutenberg eBook \#\ebook: The Theory of Spectra and Atomic Constitution.},
+ pdfkeywords={Brandeis University, The Internet Archive, Andrew D. Hwang},
+ pdfstartview=Fit, % default value
+ pdfstartpage=1, % default value
+ pdfpagemode=UseNone, % default value
+ bookmarks=true, % default value
+ linktocpage=false, % default value
+ pdfpagelayout=\PDFPageLayout,
+ pdfdisplaydoctitle,
+ pdfpagelabels=true,
+ bookmarksopen=true,
+ bookmarksopenlevel=0,
+ colorlinks=true,
+ linkcolor=\HLinkColor]{hyperref}[2007/02/07]
+
+
+%% Fixed-width environment to format PG boilerplate %%
+\newenvironment{PGtext}{%
+\begin{alltt}
+\fontsize{8.1}{10}\ttfamily\selectfont}%
+{\end{alltt}}
+
+% Stylistic changes made for consistency
+\newcommand{\Chg}[2]{#2}
+%\newcommand{\Chg}[2]{#1} % Use this to revert inconsistencies in the original
+\newcommand{\Add}[1]{\Chg{}{#1}}
+
+%% Miscellaneous global parameters %%
+% No hrule in page header
+\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt}
+
+% Loosen spacing
+\setlength{\emergencystretch}{1em}
+
+\hyphenation{electro-dynamics electro-magnetic}
+
+% Scratch pad for length calculations
+\newlength{\TmpLen}
+
+%% Running heads %%
+\newcommand{\FlushRunningHeads}{%
+ \clearpage\fancyhf{}%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{ForPrinting}}{\cleardoublepage}{\clearpage}%
+}
+\newcommand{\InitRunningHeads}{%
+ \setlength{\headheight}{15pt}
+ \pagestyle{fancy}
+ \thispagestyle{empty}
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{ForPrinting}}
+ {\fancyhead[RO,LE]{\thepage}}
+ {\fancyhead[R]{\thepage}}
+}
+
+% Uniform style for running heads
+\newcommand{\RHeads}[1]{\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}
+
+\newcommand{\SetRunningHeads}[2][C]{\fancyhead[#1]{\RHeads{#2}}}
+
+\newcommand{\BookMark}[2]{\phantomsection\pdfbookmark[#1]{#2}{#2}}
+
+%% Major document divisions %%
+\newcommand{\PGBoilerPlate}{%
+ \pagenumbering{Alph}
+ \pagestyle{empty}
+ \BookMark{0}{PG Boilerplate.}
+}
+\newcommand{\FrontMatter}{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \FlushRunningHeads
+ \frontmatter
+ \BookMark{-1}{Front Matter.}
+}
+\newcommand{\MainMatter}{%
+ \FlushRunningHeads
+ \InitRunningHeads
+ \mainmatter
+ \BookMark{-1}{Main Matter.}
+}
+\newcommand{\PGLicense}{%
+ \FlushRunningHeads
+ \pagenumbering{Roman}
+ \InitRunningHeads
+ \BookMark{-1}{PG License.}
+ \SetRunningHeads{License}
+}
+
+%% ToC formatting %%
+\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\contentsname}%
+ {\protect\thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \protect\SectTitle[\Large]{\textbf{CONTENTS}}\protect\vspace{-1.5\baselineskip}}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\TableofContents}{%
+ \FlushRunningHeads
+ \InitRunningHeads
+ \SetRunningHeads{Contents}
+ \BookMark{0}{Contents.}
+ \tableofcontents
+}
+
+% Set the section number in a fixed-width box
+\newcommand{\ToCBox}[1]{\settowidth{\TmpLen}{III.}%
+ \makebox[\TmpLen][r]{#1}\hspace*{1em}%
+}
+% For internal use, to determine if we need the Sect./Page line
+\newcommand{\ToCAnchor}{}
+
+% \ToCBox{Label}{Anchor}{Title}
+\newcommand{\ToCLine}[3]{%
+ \label{toc:#2}%
+ \ifthenelse{\not\equal{\pageref{toc:#2}}{\ToCAnchor}}{%
+ \renewcommand{\ToCAnchor}{\pageref{toc:#2}}%
+ \noindent\makebox[\textwidth][r]{\null\hfill\scriptsize PAGE}\\[8pt]%
+ }{}%
+ \settowidth{\TmpLen}{9999}%
+ \noindent\strut\parbox[b]{\textwidth-\TmpLen}{\small%
+ \ToCBox{#1}\hangindent4em#3\dotfill}%
+ \makebox[\TmpLen][r]{\pageref{#2}}%
+ \smallskip
+}
+
+%% Sectional units %%
+% Typographical abstraction
+\newcommand{\SectTitle}[2][\large]{%
+ \section*{\centering#1\normalfont #2}
+}
+\newcommand{\SubsectTitle}[2][\normalsize]{%
+ \subsection*{\centering#1\normalfont #2}
+}
+\newcommand{\SubsubsectTitle}[2][\small]{%
+ \subsubsection*{\centering#1\normalfont #2}
+}
+
+% For internal cross-referencing
+\newcommand{\EssayNo}{}
+\newcounter{SecNo}
+
+% \Essay{Number}{Title}{Footnote}
+\newcommand{\Essay}[3]{%
+ \FlushRunningHeads
+ \InitRunningHeads
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{III}}{% [** TN: Hack to handle long running head]
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{ForPrinting}}{%
+ \fancyhead[CE]{\RHeads{The Structure of the Atom and the}}%
+ \fancyhead[CO]{\RHeads{Physical and Chemical Properties of the Elements}}%
+ }{% Not ForPrinting
+ \SetRunningHeads{The Structure of the Atom}%
+ }%
+ }{% Not Essay III
+ \SetRunningHeads{#2}%
+ }
+ \BookMark{0}{Essay #1.}
+ \renewcommand{\EssayNo}{#1}% For \Eq and \Tag
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\SectTitle{ESSAY #1}}
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\SubsectTitle[\protect\small]{\MakeUppercase{#2}}}
+ \SectTitle[\Large]{ESSAY #1\footnotemark}
+ \SubsectTitle{\MakeUppercase{#2}}
+ \footnotetext{#3}%
+}
+
+% \Chapter{Number}{Title}
+\newcommand{\Chapter}[2]{%
+ \BookMark{1}{#1 #2.}
+ \label{chapter:\EssayNo.#1}
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\ToCLine{#1}{chapter:\EssayNo.#1}{\textsc{#2}}}
+ \SubsubsectTitle{#1 \MakeUppercase{#2}}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\Section}[1]{
+ \paragraph*{\indent #1}
+ \refstepcounter{SecNo}
+ \label{section:\theSecNo}
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\ToCLine{}{section:\theSecNo}{#1}}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\Preface}{%
+ \InitRunningHeads
+ \SetRunningHeads{Preface}
+ \BookMark{0}{Preface.}
+ \SectTitle[\Large]{\textbf{PREFACE}}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\Signature}[4]{%
+ \par\null\hfill#1\hspace{\parindent}
+
+ \settowidth{\TmpLen}{\small\textsc{#2}}%
+ \parbox{\TmpLen}{\centering\small\textsc{#2} \\
+ \textit{#3} #4}
+ \normalsize
+}
+
+%% Diagrams %%
+\newcommand{\DefWidth}{0.95\textwidth}% Default figure width
+\newcommand{\Graphic}[1]{%
+ \includegraphics[width=\DefWidth]{./images/fig_p#1.pdf}%
+}
+% \Figure[caption]{label}{page}
+\newcommand{\Figure}[3][]{%
+ \begin{figure}[hbt!]
+ \centering
+ \phantomsection\Pagelabel{#3}%
+ \Graphic{#3}%
+ \ifthenelse{\not\equal{#1}{}}{%
+ \\
+ #1%
+ }{% #1=[]
+ \ifthenelse{\not\equal{#2}{}}{%
+ \\
+ \label{fig:#2}%
+ Fig.~#2.%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \end{figure}\ignorespaces%
+}
+
+% \Fig[figure]{Number}
+\newcommand{\Fig}[2][fig.]{\hyperref[fig:#2]{#1~#2}}
+\newcommand{\FigNum}[1]{\hyperref[fig:#1]{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\Pagelabel}[1]{\phantomsection\label{page:#1}}
+
+% Page separators
+\newcommand{\PageSep}[1]{\ignorespaces}
+\newcommand{\PageRef}[2][page]{\hyperref[page:#2]{#1~\pageref*{page:#2}}}
+\newcommand{\PageNum}[1]{\hyperref[page:#1]{\pageref*{page:#1}}}
+
+% Miscellaneous textual conveniences (N.B. \emph, not \textit)
+\newcommand{\ie}{i.e.}
+
+\newcommand{\First}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\newcommand{\Title}[1]{\textit{#1}}% Journal title
+\newcommand{\No}[1]{\textsc{#1}}% Journal number
+
+%% Miscellaneous mathematical formatting %%
+\DeclareInputMath{176}{{}^{\circ}}
+\DeclareInputMath{183}{\cdot}
+
+% Centered column heading in left-aligned array column
+\newcommand{\ColHead}[1]{\multicolumn{1}{c}{#1}}
+% Conditional (ForPrinting-dependent) breaking for wide math
+\newcommand{\BreakMath}[2]{\ifthenelse{\boolean{ForPrinting}}{#1}{#2}}
+
+% Cross-ref-able equation tags
+\newcommand{\Tag}[1]{%
+ \phantomsection\label{eqn:\EssayNo#1}\tag*{\ensuremath{#1}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\Eq}[1]{%
+ \hyperref[eqn:\EssayNo#1]{\ensuremath{#1}}%
+}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% START OF DOCUMENT %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{document}
+%% PG BOILERPLATE %%
+\PGBoilerPlate
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+\small
+\begin{PGtext}
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Theory of Spectra and Atomic
+Constitution, by Niels (Niels Henrik David) Bohr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
+other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
+whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
+the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
+www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
+to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.
+
+
+
+Title: The Theory of Spectra and Atomic Constitution
+ Three Essays
+
+Author: Niels (Niels Henrik David) Bohr
+
+Release Date: November 26, 2014 [EBook #47464]
+Most recently updated: June 11, 2021
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THEORY OF SPECTRA ***
+\end{PGtext}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+\newpage
+%% Credits and transcriber's note %%
+\begin{center}
+\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+\begin{PGtext}
+Produced by Andrew D. Hwang
+\end{PGtext}
+\end{minipage}
+\vfill
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{minipage}{0.85\textwidth}
+\small
+\BookMark{0}{Transcriber's Note.}
+\subsection*{\centering\normalfont\scshape%
+\normalsize\MakeLowercase{\TransNote}}%
+
+\raggedright
+\TransNoteText
+\end{minipage}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% FRONT MATTER %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\PageSep{i}
+\iffalse
+% [** TN: Omitting half-title page and verso]
+The Theory of Spectra
+and
+Atomic Constitution
+\PageSep{ii}
+%[** TN: Publisher's information]
+
+CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
+C. F. CLAY, Manager
+LONDON : FETTER LANE, E.C. 4
+
+%[** TN: Publisher's device]
+
+LONDON : H. K. LEWIS AND CO., Ltd.,
+136 Gower Street, W.C. 1
+NEW YORK : THE MACMILLAN CO.
+BOMBAY }
+CALCUTTA } MACMILLAN AND CO., Ltd.
+MADRAS }
+TORONTO : THE MACMILLAN CO. OF
+CANADA, Ltd.
+TOKYO : MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA
+
+ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
+\fi
+%[** TN: End of omitted half-title]
+\PageSep{iii}
+\newpage
+\begin{center}
+\Huge\bfseries
+The Theory of Spectra \\
+and \\
+Atomic Constitution
+\bigskip
+
+\large\normalfont
+THREE ESSAYS \\
+BY \\
+\Large
+NIELS BOHR
+\medskip
+
+\normalsize
+Professor of Theoretical Physics in~the~University~of~Copenhagen
+\vfill
+
+\Large
+CAMBRIDGE \\
+AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS \\
+1922
+\end{center}
+\newpage
+\PageSep{iv}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{ForPrinting}}{% Publisher's verso
+\begin{center}
+\null\vfill
+\footnotesize
+PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN \\
+AT THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
+\end{center}
+}{}% Omit for screen-formatted version
+\PageSep{v}
+
+\FrontMatter
+
+\Preface
+
+\First{The} three essays which here appear in English all deal with
+the application of the quantum theory to problems of atomic
+structure, and refer to the different stages in the development of
+this theory.
+
+The first essay ``On the spectrum of hydrogen'' is a translation of
+a Danish address given before the Physical Society of Copenhagen
+on the 20th~of December 1913, and printed in \Title{Fysisk Tidsskrift},
+\No{xii.}\ p.~97, 1914. Although this address was delivered at a time
+when the formal development of the quantum theory was only at
+its beginning, the reader will find the general trend of thought
+very similar to that expressed in the later addresses, which
+form the other two essays. As emphasized at several points the
+theory does not attempt an ``explanation'' in the usual sense of
+this word, but only the establishment of a connection between facts
+which in the present state of science are unexplained, that is to
+say the usual physical conceptions do not offer sufficient basis for
+a detailed description.
+
+The second essay ``On the series spectra of the elements'' is a
+translation of a German address given before the Physical Society
+of Berlin on the 27th~of April 1920, and printed in \Title{Zeitschrift für
+Physik}, \No{vi.}\ p.~423, 1920. This address falls into two main parts.
+The considerations in the first part are closely related to the contents
+of the first essay; especially no use is made of the new
+formal conceptions established through the later development of
+the quantum theory. The second part contains a survey of the
+results reached by this development. An attempt is made to
+elucidate the problems by means of a general principle which postulates
+a formal correspondence between the fundamentally different
+conceptions of the classical electrodynamics and those of the
+quantum theory. The first germ of this correspondence principle
+may be found in the first essay in the deduction of the expression
+for the constant of the hydrogen spectrum in terms of
+Planck's constant and of the quantities which in Rutherford's
+\PageSep{vi}
+atomic model are necessary for the description of the hydrogen
+atom.
+
+The third essay ``The structure of the atom and the physical
+and chemical properties of the elements'' is based on a Danish
+address, given before a joint meeting of the Physical and Chemical
+Societies of Copenhagen on the 18th~of October 1921, and printed
+in \Title{Fysisk Tidsskrift}, \No{xix.}\ p.~153, 1921. While the first two essays
+form verbal translations of the respective addresses, this essay
+differs from the Danish original in certain minor points. Besides
+the addition of a few new figures with explanatory text, certain
+passages dealing with problems discussed in the second essay are
+left out, and some remarks about recent contributions to the
+subject are inserted. Where such insertions have been introduced
+will clearly appear from the text. This essay is divided into
+four parts. The first two parts contain a survey of previous results
+concerning atomic problems and a short account of the theoretical
+ideas of the quantum theory. In the following parts it is shown
+how these ideas lead to a view of atomic constitution which seems
+to offer an explanation of the observed physical and chemical
+properties of the elements, and especially to bring the characteristic
+features of the periodic table into close connection with the
+interpretation of the optical and high frequency spectra of the
+elements.
+
+For the convenience of the reader all three essays are subdivided
+into smaller paragraphs, each with a headline. Conforming to the
+character of the essays there is, however, no question of anything
+like a full account or even a proportionate treatment of the subject
+stated in these headlines, the principal object being to emphasize
+certain general views in a freer form than is usual in scientific
+treatises or text books. For the same reason no detailed references
+to the literature are given, although an attempt is made to mention
+the main contributions to the development of the subject. As
+regards further information the reader in the case of the second
+essay is referred to a larger treatise ``On the quantum theory of
+line spectra,'' two parts of which have appeared in the Transactions of
+the Copenhagen Academy (\Title{D.\ Kgl.\ Danske Vidensk.\ Selsk.\ Skrifter},
+8.\ Række, \No{iv.}~1, I~and~II, 1918),\footnote
+ {See \href{http://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/47167}{www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/47167}.---\textit{Trans.}}
+where full references to the literature
+may be found. The proposed continuation of this treatise, mentioned
+\PageSep{vii}
+at several places in the second essay, has for various reasons been
+delayed, but in the near future the work will be completed by the
+publication of a third part. It is my intention to deal more fully
+with the problems discussed in the third essay by a larger systematic
+account of the application of the quantum theory to atomic
+problems, which is under preparation.
+
+As mentioned both in the beginning and at the end of the
+third essay, the considerations which it contains are clearly still
+incomplete in character. This holds not only as regards the
+elaboration of details, but also as regards the development of the
+theoretical ideas. It may be useful once more to emphasize,
+that---although the word ``explanation'' has been used more
+liberally than for instance in the first essay---we are not concerned
+with a description of the phenomena, based on a well-defined
+physical picture. It may rather be said that hitherto every
+progress in the problem of atomic structure has tended to emphasize
+the well-known ``mysteries'' of the quantum theory more and more.
+I hope the exposition in these essays is sufficiently clear, nevertheless,
+to give the reader an impression of the peculiar charm
+which the study of atomic physics possesses just on this account.
+
+I wish to express my best thanks to Dr~A.~D. Udden, University
+of Pennsylvania, who has undertaken the translation of the
+original addresses into English, and to Mr~C.~D. Ellis, Trinity
+College, Cambridge, who has looked through the manuscript and
+suggested many valuable improvements in the exposition of the
+subject.
+\Signature{N. BOHR.}{Copenhagen,}{May}{1922.}
+\PageSep{viii}
+
+\TableofContents
+
+\iffalse
+%[** TN: Original ToC text (not manually verified)]
+CONTENTS
+
+ESSAY I
+ON THE SPECTRUM OF HYDROGEN
+
+PAGE
+
+Empirical Spectral Laws 1
+Laws of Temperature Radiation 4
+The Nuclear Theory of the Atom 7
+Quantum Theory of Spectra 10
+Hydrogen Spectrum 12
+The Pickering Lines 15
+Other Spectra 18
+
+
+ESSAY II
+ON THE SERIES SPECTRA OF THE ELEMENTS
+
+I. Introduction .20
+
+II. General Principles of the Quantum Theory of Spectra . 23
+Hydrogen Spectrum 24
+The Correspondence Principle 27
+General Spectral Laws 29
+Absorption and Excitation of Radiation 32
+
+III. Development of the Quantum Theory of Spectra . . 36
+Effect of External Forces on the Hydrogen Spectrum . . 37
+The Stark Effect 39
+The Zeeman Effect 42
+Central Perturbations . 44
+Relativity Effect on Hydrogen Lines 46
+Theory of Series Spectra 48
+Correspondence Principle and Conservation of Angular Momentum 50
+The Spectra of Helium and Lithium 54
+Complex Structure of Series Lines 58
+
+IV. Conclusion 59
+
+\PageSep{ix}
+CONTENTS
+
+ESSAY III
+
+THE STRUCTURE OF THE ATOM AND THE PHYSICAL
+AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF THE ELEMENTS
+
+PAGE
+
+I. Preliminary 61
+The Nuclear Atom 61
+The Postulates of the Quantum Theory 62
+Hydrogen Atom 63
+Hydrogen Spectrum and X-ray Spectra 65
+The Fine Structure of the Hydrogen Lines .... 67
+Periodic Table 69
+Recent Atomic Models 74
+
+II. Series Spectra and the Capture of Electrons by Atoms . 75
+Arc and Spark Spectra 76
+Series Diagram 78
+Correspondence Principle 81
+
+III. Formation of Atoms and the Periodic Table ... 85
+First Period. Hydrogen---Helium 85
+Second Period. Lithium---Neon 89
+Third Period. Sodium---Argon 95
+Fourth Period. Potassium---Krypton 100
+Fifth Period. Rubidium--- Xenon 108
+Sixth Period. Caesium---Niton 109
+Seventh Period 111
+Survey of the Periodic Table 113
+
+IV. Reorganization of Atoms and X-ray Spectra . . .116
+Absorption and Emission of X-rays and Correspondence Principle 117
+X-ray Spectra and Atomic Structure 119
+Classification of X-ray Spectra 121
+Conclusion 125
+\fi
+%[** TN: End of original ToC text]
+\PageSep{1}
+\MainMatter
+
+\Essay{I}{On the Spectrum of Hydrogen}
+ {Address delivered before the Physical Society in Copenhagen, Dec.~20, 1913.}
+
+\Section{Empirical spectral laws.} Hydrogen possesses not only the
+smallest atomic weight of all the elements, but it also occupies a
+peculiar position both with regard to its physical and its chemical
+properties. One of the points where this becomes particularly apparent
+is the hydrogen line spectrum.
+
+The spectrum of hydrogen observed in an ordinary Geissler tube
+consists of a series of lines, the strongest of which lies at the red
+end of the spectrum, while the others extend out into the ultra\Add{-}violet,
+the distance between the various lines, as well as their intensities,
+constantly decreasing. In the ultra\Add{-}violet the series converges
+to a limit.
+
+Balmer, as we know, discovered (1885) that it was possible to
+represent the wave lengths of these lines very accurately by the
+simple law
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda_{n}} = R \left(\frac{1}{4} - \frac{1}{n^{2}}\right),
+\Tag{(1)}
+\]
+where $R$~is a constant and $n$~is a whole number. The wave lengths
+of the five strongest hydrogen lines, corresponding to $n = 3$, $4$,~$5$, $6$,~$7$,
+measured in air at ordinary pressure and temperature, and the
+values of these wave lengths multiplied by $\left(\dfrac{1}{4} - \dfrac{1}{n^{2}}\right)$ are given in
+the following table:\Pagelabel{1}
+\[
+%[** TN: Original uses a period for multiplication and a center dot as a decimal point]
+\begin{array}{*{2}{c<{\qquad\qquad}}c}
+n & \lambda · 10^{8} & \lambda · \left(\dfrac{1}{4} - \dfrac{1}{n^{2}}\right) · 10^{10} \\
+3 & 6563.04 & 91153.3 \\
+4 & 4861.49 & 91152.9 \\
+5 & 4340.66 & 91153.9 \\
+6 & 4101.85 & 91152.2 \\
+7 & 3970.25 & 91153.7 \\
+\end{array}
+\]
+The table shows that the product is nearly constant, while the deviations
+are not greater than might be ascribed to experimental errors.
+
+As you already know, Balmer's discovery of the law relating to
+the hydrogen spectrum led to the discovery of laws applying to
+the spectra of other elements. The most important work in this
+\PageSep{2}
+connection was done by Rydberg (1890) and Ritz (1908). Rydberg
+pointed out that the spectra of many elements contain series of
+lines whose wave lengths are given approximately by the formula
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda_{n}} = A - \frac{R}{(n + \alpha)^{2}},
+\]
+where $A$~and~$\alpha$ are constants having different values for the various
+series, while $R$~is a universal constant equal to the constant in the
+spectrum of hydrogen. If the wave lengths are measured in vacuo
+Rydberg calculated the value of~$R$ to be~$109675$. In the spectra of
+many elements, as opposed to the simple spectrum of hydrogen, there
+are several series of lines whose wave lengths are to a close approximation
+given by Rydberg's formula if different values are assigned to
+the constants $A$~and~$\alpha$. Rydberg showed, however, in his earliest
+work, that certain relations existed between the constants in the
+various series of the spectrum of one and the same element. These
+relations were later very successfully generalized by Ritz through
+the establishment of the ``combination principle.'' According to
+this principle, the wave lengths of the various lines in the spectrum
+of an element may be expressed by the formula
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda} = F_{r}(n_{1}) - F_{s}(n_{2}).
+\Tag{(2)}
+\]
+In this formula $n_{1}$~and~$n_{2}$ are whole numbers, and $F_{1}(n)$, $F_{2}(n)$,~\dots\ is
+a series of functions of~$n$, which may be written approximately
+\[
+F_{r}(n) = \frac{R}{(n + \alpha_{r})^{2}},
+\]
+where $R$~is Rydberg's universal constant and $\alpha_{r}$ is a constant which
+is different for the different functions. A particular spectral line will,
+according to this principle, correspond to each combination of $n_{1}$~and~$n_{2}$,
+as well as to the functions $F_{1}$, $F_{2}$,~\dots. The establishment of
+this principle led therefore to the prediction of a great number of
+lines which were not included in the spectral formulae previously
+considered, and in a large number of cases the calculations were
+found to be in close agreement with the experimental observations.
+In the case of hydrogen Ritz assumed that formula~\Eq{(1)} was a special
+case of the general formula
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda} = R\left(\frac{1}{n_{1}^{2}} - \frac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right),
+\Tag{(3)}
+\]
+\PageSep{3}
+and therefore predicted among other things a series of lines in the
+infra\Add{-}red given by the formula
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda} = R\left(\frac{1}{9} - \frac{1}{n^{2}}\right).
+\]
+In 1909 Paschen succeeded in observing the first two lines of this
+series corresponding to $n = 4$ and $n = 5$.
+
+The part played by hydrogen in the development of our
+knowledge of the spectral laws is not solely due to its ordinary
+simple spectrum, but it can also be traced in other less direct
+ways. At a time when Rydberg's laws were still in want of
+further confirmation Pickering (1897) found in the spectrum of a
+star a series of lines whose wave lengths showed a very simple relation
+to the ordinary hydrogen spectrum, since to a very close
+approximation they could be expressed by the formula
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda} = R\left(\frac{1}{4} - \frac{1}{(n + \frac{1}{2})^{2}}\right).
+\]
+Rydberg considered these lines to represent a new series of lines
+in the spectrum of hydrogen, and predicted according to his theory
+the existence of still another series of hydrogen lines the wave
+lengths of which would be given by
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda} = R\left(\frac{1}{(\frac{3}{2})^{2}} - \frac{1}{n^{2}}\right).
+\]
+By examining earlier observations it was actually found that a line
+had been observed in the spectrum of certain stars which coincided
+closely with the first line in this series (corresponding to $n = 2$);
+from analogy with other spectra it was also to be expected that this
+would be the strongest line. This was regarded as a great triumph
+for Rydberg's theory and tended to remove all doubt that the new
+spectrum was actually due to hydrogen. Rydberg's view has therefore
+been generally accepted by physicists up to the present moment.
+Recently however the question has been reopened and Fowler
+(1912) has succeeded in observing the Pickering lines in ordinary
+laboratory experiments. We shall return to this question again
+later.
+
+The discovery of these beautiful and simple laws concerning the
+line spectra of the elements has naturally resulted in many attempts
+at a theoretical explanation. Such attempts are very alluring
+\PageSep{4}
+because the simplicity of the spectral laws and the exceptional accuracy
+with which they apply appear to promise that the correct explanation
+will be very simple and will give valuable information
+about the properties of matter. I should like to consider some of
+these theories somewhat more closely, several of which are extremely
+interesting and have been developed with the greatest keenness
+and ingenuity, but unfortunately space does not permit me to do
+so here. I shall have to limit myself to the statement that not
+one of the theories so far proposed appears to offer a satisfactory or
+even a plausible way of explaining the laws of the line spectra.
+Considering our deficient knowledge of the laws which determine
+the processes inside atoms it is scarcely possible to give an explanation
+of the kind attempted in these theories. The inadequacy of
+our ordinary theoretical conceptions has become especially apparent
+from the important results which have been obtained in recent years
+from the theoretical and experimental study of the laws of temperature
+radiation. You will therefore understand that I shall not
+attempt to propose an explanation of the spectral laws; on the
+contrary I shall try to indicate a way in which it appears possible
+to bring the spectral laws into close connection with other properties
+of the elements, which appear to be equally inexplicable on
+the basis of the present state of the science. In these considerations
+I shall employ the results obtained from the study of temperature
+radiation as well as the view of atomic structure which has been
+reached by the study of the radioactive elements.
+
+\Section{Laws of temperature radiation.} I shall commence by mentioning
+the conclusions which have been drawn from experimental
+and theoretical work on temperature radiation.
+
+Let us consider an enclosure surrounded by bodies which are in
+temperature equilibrium. In this space there will be a certain
+amount of energy contained in the rays emitted by the surrounding
+substances and crossing each other in every direction. By making
+the assumption that the temperature equilibrium will not be disturbed
+by the mutual radiation of the various bodies Kirchhoff
+(1860) showed that the amount of energy per unit volume as well
+as the distribution of this energy among the various wave lengths
+is independent of the form and size of the space and of the nature
+\PageSep{5}
+of the surrounding bodies and depends only on the temperature.
+Kirchhoff's result has been confirmed by experiment, and the
+amount of energy and its distribution among the various wave
+lengths and the manner in which it depends on the temperature
+are now fairly well known from a great amount of experimental
+work; or, as it is usually expressed, we have a fairly
+accurate experimental knowledge of the ``laws of temperature
+radiation.''
+
+Kirchhoff's considerations were only capable of predicting the
+existence of a law of temperature radiation, and many physicists
+have subsequently attempted to find a more thorough explanation
+of the experimental results. You will perceive that the electromagnetic
+theory of light together with the electron theory suggests
+a method of solving this problem. According to the electron theory
+of matter a body consists of a system of electrons. By making
+certain definite assumptions concerning the forces acting on the
+electrons it is possible to calculate their motion and consequently
+the energy radiated from the body per second in the form of
+electromagnetic oscillations of various wave lengths. In a similar
+manner the absorption of rays of a given wave length by a substance
+can be determined by calculating the effect of electromagnetic
+oscillations upon the motion of the electrons. Having investigated
+the emission and absorption of a body at all temperatures, and for
+rays of all wave lengths, it is possible, as Kirchhoff has shown, to
+determine immediately the laws of temperature radiation. Since
+the result is to be independent of the nature of the body we are
+justified in expecting an agreement with experiment, even though
+very special assumptions are made about the forces acting upon
+the electrons of the hypothetical substance. This naturally
+simplifies the problem considerably, but it is nevertheless sufficiently
+difficult and it is remarkable that it has been possible
+to make any advance at all in this direction. As is well known
+this has been done by Lorentz (1903). He calculated the
+emissive as well as the absorptive power of a metal for long
+wave lengths, using the same assumptions about the motions
+of the electrons in the metal that Drude (1900) employed in
+his calculation of the ratio of the electrical and thermal conductivities.
+Subsequently, by calculating the ratio of the emissive
+\PageSep{6}
+to the absorptive power, Lorentz really obtained an expression
+for the law of temperature radiation which for long wave lengths
+agrees remarkably well with experimental facts. In spite of this
+beautiful and promising result, it has nevertheless become apparent
+that the electromagnetic theory is incapable of explaining the law
+of temperature radiation. For, it is possible to show, that, if the
+investigation is not confined to oscillations of long wave lengths,
+as in Lorentz's work, but is also extended to oscillations corresponding
+to small wave lengths, results are obtained which are
+contrary to experiment. This is especially evident from Jeans'
+investigations (1905) in which he employed a very interesting
+statistical method first proposed by Lord Rayleigh.
+
+We are therefore compelled to assume, that the classical electrodynamics
+does not agree with reality, or expressed more carefully,
+that it \Chg{can not}{cannot} be employed in calculating the absorption and
+emission of radiation by atoms. Fortunately, the law of temperature
+radiation has also successfully indicated the direction in which the
+necessary changes in the electrodynamics are to be sought. Even
+before the appearance of the papers by Lorentz and Jeans, Planck
+(1900) had derived theoretically a formula for the black body radiation
+which was in good agreement with the results of experiment.
+Planck did not limit himself exclusively to the classical electrodynamics,
+but introduced the further assumption that a system of
+oscillating electrical particles (elementary resonators) will neither
+radiate nor absorb energy continuously, as required by the ordinary
+electrodynamics, but on the contrary will radiate and absorb discontinuously.
+The energy contained within the system at any
+moment is always equal to a whole multiple of the so-called
+quantum of energy the magnitude of which is equal to~$h\nu$, where
+$h$~is Planck's constant and $\nu$~is the frequency of oscillation of the
+system per second. In formal respects Planck's theory leaves much
+to be desired; in certain calculations the ordinary electrodynamics
+is used, while in others assumptions distinctly at variance with it
+are introduced without any attempt being made to show that it
+is possible to give a consistent explanation of the procedure used.
+Planck's theory would hardly have acquired general recognition
+merely on the ground of its agreement with experiments on black
+body radiation, but, as you know, the theory has also contributed
+\PageSep{7}
+quite remarkably to the elucidation of many different physical
+phenomena, such as specific heats, photoelectric effect, X-rays and
+the absorption of heat rays by gases. These explanations involve
+more than the qualitative assumption of a discontinuous transformation
+of energy, for with the aid of Planck's constant~$h$ it
+seems to be possible, at least approximately, to account for a great
+number of phenomena about which nothing could be said previously.
+It is therefore hardly too early to express the opinion that, whatever
+the final explanation will be, the discovery of ``energy quanta''
+must be considered as one of the most important results arrived at
+in physics, and must be taken into consideration in investigations
+of the properties of atoms and particularly in connection with any
+explanation of the spectral laws in which such phenomena as
+the emission and absorption of electromagnetic radiation are
+concerned.
+
+\Section{The nuclear theory of the atom.} We shall now consider the
+second part of the foundation on which we shall build, namely the
+conclusions arrived at from experiments with the rays emitted by
+radioactive substances. I have previously here in the Physical
+Society had the opportunity of speaking of the scattering of $\alpha$~rays
+in passing through thin plates, and to mention how Rutherford
+(1911) has proposed a theory for the structure of the atom in
+order to explain the remarkable and unexpected results of these
+experiments. I shall, therefore, only remind you that the characteristic
+feature of Rutherford's theory is the assumption of the
+existence of a positively charged nucleus inside the atom. A number
+of electrons are supposed to revolve in closed orbits around the
+nucleus, the number of these electrons being sufficient to neutralize
+the positive charge of the nucleus. The dimensions of the nucleus
+are supposed to be very small in comparison with the dimensions
+of the orbits of the electrons, and almost the entire mass of the
+atom is supposed to be concentrated in the nucleus.
+
+According to Rutherford's calculation the positive charge of the
+nucleus corresponds to a number of electrons equal to about half
+the atomic weight. This number coincides approximately with the
+number of the particular element in the periodic system and it is
+therefore natural to assume that the number of electrons in the
+\PageSep{8}
+atom is exactly equal to this number. This hypothesis, which was
+first stated by van~den Broek (1912), opens the possibility of
+obtaining a simple explanation of the periodic system. This assumption
+is strongly confirmed by experiments on the elements
+of small atomic weight. In the first place, it is evident that according
+to Rutherford's theory the $\alpha$~particle is the same as the
+nucleus of a helium atom. Since the $\alpha$~particle has a double positive
+charge it follows immediately that a neutral helium atom contains
+two electrons. Further the concordant results obtained from calculations
+based on experiments as different as the diffuse scattering
+of X-rays and the decrease in velocity of $\alpha$~rays in passing
+through matter render the conclusion extremely likely that a
+hydrogen atom contains only a single electron. This agrees most
+beautifully with the fact that J.~J. Thomson in his well-known
+experiments on rays of positive electricity has never observed a
+hydrogen atom with more than a single positive charge, while all
+other elements investigated may have several charges.
+
+Let us now assume that a hydrogen atom simply consists of an
+electron revolving around a nucleus of equal and opposite charge,
+and of a mass which is very large in comparison with that of the
+electron. It is evident that this assumption may explain the peculiar
+position already referred to which hydrogen occupies among the
+elements, but it appears at the outset completely hopeless to attempt
+to explain anything at all of the special properties of hydrogen,
+still less its line spectrum, on the basis of considerations relating
+to such a simple system.
+
+Let us assume for the sake of brevity that the mass of the nucleus
+is infinitely large in proportion to that of the electron, and that the
+velocity of the electron is very small in comparison with that of
+light. If we now temporarily disregard the energy radiation, which,
+according to the ordinary electrodynamics, will accompany the accelerated
+motion of the electron, the latter in accordance with
+Kepler's first law will describe an ellipse with the nucleus in one
+of the foci. Denoting the frequency of revolution by~$\omega$, and the
+major axis of the ellipse by~$2a$ we find that
+\[
+\omega^{2} = \frac{2W^{3}}{\pi^{2} e^{4} m},\quad
+2a = \frac{e^{2}}{W},
+\Tag{(4)}
+\]
+\PageSep{9}
+where $e$~is the charge of the electron and $m$~its mass, while $W$~is
+the work which must be added to the system in order to remove
+the electron to an infinite distance from the nucleus.
+
+These expressions are extremely simple and they show that the
+magnitude of the frequency of revolution as well as the length of
+the major axis depend only on~$W$, and are independent of the
+\Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity} of the orbit. By varying~$W$ we may obtain all possible
+values for $\omega$~and~$2a$. This condition shows, however, that it is not
+possible to employ the above formulae directly in calculating the
+orbit of the electron in a hydrogen atom. For this it will be necessary
+to assume that the orbit of the electron \Chg{can not}{cannot} take on all values,
+and in any event, the line spectrum clearly indicates that the
+oscillations of the electron cannot vary continuously between wide
+limits. The impossibility of making any progress with a simple
+system like the one considered here might have been foretold from
+a consideration of the dimensions involved; for with the aid of $e$~and
+$m$~alone it is impossible to obtain a quantity which can be
+interpreted as a diameter of an atom or as a frequency.
+
+If we attempt to account for the radiation of energy in the manner
+required by the ordinary electrodynamics it will only make matters
+worse. As a result of the radiation of energy~$W$ would continually
+increase, and the above expressions~\Eq{(4)} show that at the same time
+the frequency of revolution of the system would increase, and the
+dimensions of the orbit decrease. This process would not stop until
+the particles had approached so closely to one another that they no
+longer attracted each other. The quantity of energy which would
+be radiated away before this happened would be very great. If we
+were to treat these particles as geometrical points this energy would
+be infinitely great, and with the dimensions of the electrons as
+calculated from their mass (about $10^{-13}$~cm.), and of the nucleus as
+calculated by Rutherford (about $10^{-12}$~cm.), this energy would be
+many times greater than the energy changes with which we are
+familiar in ordinary atomic processes.
+
+It can be seen that it is impossible to employ Rutherford's atomic
+model so long as we confine ourselves exclusively to the ordinary
+electrodynamics. But this is nothing more than might have been
+expected. As I have mentioned we may consider it to be an
+established fact that it is impossible to obtain a satisfactory
+\PageSep{10}
+explanation of the experiments on temperature radiation with the
+aid of electrodynamics, no matter what atomic model be employed.
+The fact that the deficiencies of the atomic model we are
+considering stand out so plainly is therefore perhaps no serious
+drawback; even though the defects of other atomic models are
+much better concealed they must nevertheless be present and will
+be just as serious.
+
+\Section{Quantum theory of spectra.} Let us now try to overcome these
+difficulties by applying Planck's theory to the problem.
+
+It is readily seen that there can be no question of a direct application
+of Planck's theory. This theory is concerned with the emission
+and absorption of energy in a system of electrical particles, which
+oscillate with a given frequency per second, dependent only on the
+nature of the system and independent of the amount of energy
+contained in the system. In a system consisting of an electron and
+a nucleus the period of oscillation corresponds to the period of
+revolution of the electron. But the formula~\Eq{(4)} for~$\omega$ shows that the
+frequency of revolution depends upon~$W$, \ie\ on the energy of the
+system. Still the fact that we \Chg{can not}{cannot} immediately apply Planck's
+theory to our problem is not as serious as it might seem to be, for
+in assuming Planck's theory we have manifestly acknowledged the
+inadequacy of the ordinary electrodynamics and have definitely
+parted with the coherent group of ideas on which the latter theory
+is based. In fact in taking such a step we \Chg{can not}{cannot} expect that all
+cases of disagreement between the theoretical conceptions hitherto
+employed and experiment will be removed by the use of Planck's
+assumption regarding the quantum of the energy momentarily
+present in an oscillating system. We stand here almost entirely on
+virgin ground, and upon introducing new assumptions we need only
+take care not to get into contradiction with experiment. Time will
+have to show to what extent this can be avoided; but the safest
+way is, of course, to make as few assumptions as possible.
+
+With this in mind let us first examine the experiments on
+temperature radiation. The subject of direct observation is the
+distribution of radiant energy over oscillations of the various wave
+lengths. Even though we may assume that this energy comes from
+systems of oscillating particles, we know little or nothing about
+\PageSep{11}
+these systems. No one has ever seen a Planck's resonator, nor
+indeed even measured its frequency of oscillation; we can observe
+only the period of oscillation of the radiation which is emitted. It
+is therefore very convenient that it is possible to show that to
+obtain the laws of temperature radiation it is not necessary to
+make any assumptions about the systems which emit the radiation
+except that the amount of energy emitted each time shall be equal
+to~$h\nu$, where $h$~is Planck's constant and $\nu$~is the frequency of the
+radiation. Indeed, it is possible to derive Planck's law of radiation
+from this assumption alone, as shown by Debye, who employed a
+method which is a combination of that of Planck and of Jeans.
+Before considering any further the nature of the oscillating systems
+let us see whether it is possible to bring this assumption about the
+emission of radiation into agreement with the spectral laws.
+
+If the spectrum of some element contains a spectral line corresponding
+to the frequency~$\nu$ it will be assumed that one of the
+atoms of the element (or some other elementary system) can emit
+an amount of energy~$h\nu$. Denoting the energy of the atom before
+and after the emission of the radiation by $E_{1}$ and~$E_{2}$ we have
+\[
+h\nu = E_{1} - E_{2} \text{ or }
+\nu = \frac{E_{1}}{h} - \frac{E_{2}}{h}.
+\Tag{(5)}
+\]
+
+During the emission of the radiation the system may be regarded
+as passing from one state to another; in order to introduce a name
+for these states, we shall call them ``stationary'' states, simply
+indicating thereby that they form some kind of waiting places
+between which occurs the emission of the energy corresponding to
+the various spectral lines. As previously mentioned the spectrum
+of an element consists of a series of lines whose wave lengths may
+be expressed by the formula~\Eq{(2)}. By comparing this expression
+with the relation given above it is seen that---since $\nu = \dfrac{c}{\lambda}$, where $c$~is
+the velocity of light---each of the spectral lines may be regarded
+as being emitted by the transition of a system between two stationary
+states in which the energy apart from an additive arbitrary
+constant is given by $-ch F_{r}(n_{1})$ and $-ch F_{s}(n_{2})$ respectively. Using
+this interpretation the combination principle asserts that a series
+of stationary states exists for the given system, and that it can
+\PageSep{12}
+pass from one to any other of these states with the emission of
+a monochromatic radiation. We see, therefore, that with a simple
+extension of our first assumption it is possible to give a formal
+explanation of the most general law of line spectra.
+
+\Section{Hydrogen spectrum.} This result encourages us to make an
+attempt to obtain a clear conception of the stationary states which
+have so far only been regarded as formal. With this end in view,
+we naturally turn to the spectrum of hydrogen. The formula
+applying to this spectrum is given by the expression
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda} = \frac{R}{n_{1}^{2}} - \frac{R}{n_{2}^{2}}.
+\]
+According to our assumption this spectrum is produced by transitions
+between a series of stationary states of a system, concerning
+which we can for the present only say that the energy of the system
+in the $n$th~state, apart from an additive constant, is given by
+$-\dfrac{Rhc}{n^{2}}$. Let us now try to find a connection between this and the
+model of the hydrogen atom. We assume that in the calculation
+of the frequency of revolution of the electron in the stationary states
+of the atom it will be possible to employ the above formula for~$\omega$.
+It is quite natural to make this assumption; since, in trying to
+form a reasonable conception of the stationary states, there is, for
+the present at least, no other means available besides the ordinary
+mechanics.
+
+Corresponding to the $n$th~stationary state in formula~\Eq{(4)} for~$\omega$,
+let us by way of experiment put $W = \dfrac{Rhc}{n^{2}}$. This gives us
+\[
+\omega_{n}^{2} = \frac{2}{\pi^{2}}\, \frac{R^{3} h^{3} c^{3}}{e^{4} mn^{6}}.
+\Tag{(6)}
+\]
+
+The radiation of light corresponding to a particular spectral line
+is according to our assumption emitted by a transition between
+two stationary states, corresponding to two different frequencies of
+revolution, and we are not justified in expecting any simple relation
+between these frequencies of revolution of the electron and
+the frequency of the emitted radiation. You understand, of course,
+that I am by no means trying to give what might ordinarily be
+described as an explanation; nothing has been said here about
+\PageSep{13}
+how or why the radiation is emitted. On one point, however, we
+may expect a connection with the ordinary conceptions; namely,
+that it will be possible to calculate the emission of slow electromagnetic
+oscillations on the basis of the classical electrodynamics.
+This assumption is very strongly supported by the result of
+Lorentz's calculations which have already been described. From
+the formula for~$\omega$ it is seen that the frequency of revolution decreases
+as $n$~increases, and that the expression~$\dfrac{\omega_{n}}{\omega_{n+1}}$ approaches the
+value~$1$.
+
+According to what has been said above, the frequency of the
+radiation corresponding to the transition between the $(n + 1)$th
+and the $n$th~stationary state is given by
+\[
+\nu = Rc \left(\frac{1}{n^{2}} - \frac{1}{(n + 1)^{2}}\right).
+\]
+If $n$~is very large this expression is approximately equal to
+\[
+\nu = 2Rc/n^{3}.
+\]
+In order to obtain a connection with the ordinary electrodynamics
+let us now place this frequency equal to the frequency of revolution,
+that is
+\[
+\omega_{n} = 2Rc/n^{3}.
+\]
+Introducing this value of~$\omega_{n}$ in~\Eq{(6)} we see that $n$~disappears from
+the equation, and further that the equation will be satisfied only if
+\[
+R = \frac{2\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{ch^{3}}.
+\Tag{(7)}
+\]
+The constant~$R$ is very accurately known, and is, as I have said
+before, equal to~$109675$. By introducing the most recent values
+for $e$,~$m$ and~$h$ the expression on the right-hand side of the equation
+becomes equal to $1.09 · 10^{5}$. The agreement is as good as
+could be expected, considering the uncertainty in the experimental
+determination of the constants $e$,~$m$ and~$h$. The agreement between
+our calculations and the classical electrodynamics is, therefore,
+fully as good as we are justified in expecting.
+
+We \Chg{can not}{cannot} expect to obtain a corresponding explanation of the
+frequency values of the other stationary states. Certain simple
+formal relations apply, however, to all the stationary states. By
+introducing the expression, which has been found for~$R$, we
+get for the $n$th~state $W_{n} = \frac{1}{2}nh\omega_{n}$. This equation is entirely
+\PageSep{14}
+analogous to Planck's assumption concerning the energy of a
+resonator. $W$~in our system is readily shown to be equal to the
+average value of the kinetic energy of the electron during a
+single revolution. The energy of a resonator was shown by Planck
+you may remember to be always equal to~$nh\nu$. Further the average
+value of the kinetic energy of Planck's resonator is equal to its
+potential energy, so that the average value of the kinetic energy
+of the resonator, according to Planck, is equal to~$\frac{1}{2}nh\omega$. This
+analogy suggests another manner of presenting the theory, and it
+was just in this way that I was originally led into these considerations.
+When we consider how differently the equation is
+employed here and in Planck's theory it appears to me misleading
+to use this analogy as a foundation, and in the account I have
+given I have tried to free myself as much as possible from it.
+
+Let us continue with the elucidation of the calculations, and in
+the expression for~$2a$ introduce the value of~$W$ which corresponds
+to the $n$th~stationary state. This gives us
+\[
+2a = n^{2} · \frac{e^{2}}{chR}
+ = n^{2} · \frac{h^{2}}{2\pi^{2} me^{2}}
+ = n^{2} · 1.1 · 10^{-8}.
+\Tag{(8)}
+\]
+
+It is seen that for small values of~$n$, we obtain values for the
+major axis of the orbit of the electron which are of the same
+order of magnitude as the values of the diameters of the atoms
+calculated from the kinetic theory of gases. For large values of~$n$,
+$2a$~becomes very large in proportion to the calculated dimensions
+of the atoms. This, however, does not necessarily disagree with
+experiment. Under ordinary circumstances a hydrogen atom will
+probably exist only in the state corresponding to $n = 1$. For this
+state $W$~will have its greatest value and, consequently, the atom
+will have emitted the largest amount of energy possible; this will
+therefore represent the most stable state of the atom from which
+the system \Chg{can not}{cannot} be transferred except by adding energy to it
+from without. The large values for~$2a$ corresponding to large~$n$ need
+not, therefore, be contrary to experiment; indeed, we may in these
+large values seek an explanation of the fact, that in the laboratory
+it has hitherto not been possible to observe the hydrogen lines
+corresponding to large values of~$n$ in Balmer's formula, while they
+have been observed in the spectra of certain stars. In order that
+the large orbits of the electrons may not be disturbed by electrical
+\PageSep{15}
+forces from the neighbouring atoms the pressure will have to be
+very low, so low, indeed, that it is impossible to obtain sufficient
+light from a Geissler tube of ordinary dimensions. In the stars,
+however, we may assume that we have to do with hydrogen which
+is exceedingly attenuated and distributed throughout an enormously
+large region of space.
+
+\Section{The Pickering lines.} You have probably noticed that we have
+not mentioned at all the spectrum found in certain stars which
+according to the opinion then current was assigned to hydrogen,
+and together with the ordinary hydrogen spectrum was considered
+by Rydberg to form a connected system of lines completely
+analogous to the spectra of other elements. You have probably
+also perceived that difficulties would arise in interpreting this
+spectrum by means of the assumptions which have been employed.
+If such an attempt were to be made it would be necessary to give
+up the simple considerations which lead to the expression~\Eq{(7)} for
+the constant~$R$. We shall see, however, that it appears possible to
+explain the occurrence of this spectrum in another way. Let us
+suppose that it is not due to hydrogen, but to some other simple
+system consisting of a single electron revolving about a nucleus
+with an electrical charge~$Ne$. The expression for~$\omega$ becomes then
+\[
+\omega^{2} = \frac{2}{\pi^{2}}\, \frac{W^{3}}{N^{2} e^{4} m}.
+\]
+Repeating the same calculations as before only in the inverse
+order we find, that this system will emit a line spectrum given by
+the expression
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda}
+ = \frac{2\pi^{2} N^{2} e^{4} m}{ch^{3}}\left(\frac{1}{n_{1}^{2}} - \frac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right)
+ = R\raisebox{-4pt}{$\Biggl($}\frac{1}{\left(\dfrac{n_{1}}{N}\right)^{2}} - \frac{1}{\left(\dfrac{n_{2}}{N}\right)^{2}}\raisebox{-4pt}{$\Biggr)$}.
+\Tag{(9)}
+\]
+
+By comparing this formula with the formula for Pickering's and
+Rydberg's series, we see that the observed lines can be explained
+on the basis of the theory, if it be assumed that the spectrum is
+due to an electron revolving about a nucleus with a charge~$2e$, or
+according to Rutherford's theory around the nucleus of a helium
+atom. The fact that the spectrum in question is not observed in
+an ordinary helium tube, but only in stars, may be accounted for
+\PageSep{16}
+by the high degree of ionization which is required for the production
+of this spectrum; a neutral helium atom contains of course
+two electrons while the system under consideration contains
+only one.
+
+These conclusions appear to be supported by experiment.
+Fowler, as I have mentioned, has recently succeeded in observing
+Pickering's and Rydberg's lines in a laboratory experiment. By
+passing a very heavy current through a mixture of hydrogen and
+helium Fowler observed not only these lines but also a new series
+of lines. This new series was of the same general type, the wave
+length being given approximately by
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda}
+ = R\left(\frac{1}{(\frac{3}{2})^{2}} - \frac{1}{(n + \frac{1}{2})^{2}}\right).
+\]
+Fowler interpreted all the observed lines as the hydrogen spectrum
+sought for. With the observation of the latter series of lines,
+however, the basis of the analogy between the hypothetical
+hydrogen spectrum and the other spectra disappeared, and thereby
+also the foundation upon which Rydberg had founded his conclusions;
+on the contrary it is seen, that the occurrence of the lines
+was exactly what was to be expected on our view.
+
+In the following table the first column contains the wave
+lengths measured by Fowler, while the second contains the limiting
+values of the experimental errors given by him; in the third
+column we find the products of the wave lengths by the quantity
+$\left(\dfrac{1}{n_{1}^{2}} - \dfrac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right) \Add{·} 10^{10}$; the values employed for $n_{1}$~and~$n_{2}$ are enclosed in
+parentheses in the last column.
+\begin{table}[hbt]
+\Pagelabel{16}
+\[
+\begin{array}{l*{2}{>{\qquad}l}l}
+\ColHead{\lambda · 10^{8}} &
+\ColHead{\text{Limit of error}} &
+\ColHead{\lambda · \left(\dfrac{1}{n_{1}^{2}} - \dfrac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right) · 10^{10}} & \\
+4685.98 & 0.01 & 22779.1 & (3 : 4) \\
+3203.30 & 0.05 & 22779.0 & (3 : 5) \\
+2733.34 & 0.05 & 22777.8 & (3 : 6) \\
+2511.31 & 0.05 & 22778.3 & (3 : 7) \\
+2385.47 & 0.05 & 22777.9 & (3 : 8) \\
+2306.20 & 0.10 & 22777.3 & (3 : 9) \\
+2252.88 & 0.10 & 22779.1 & (3 : 10) \\
+5410.5 & 1.0 & 22774 & (4 : 7) \\
+4541.3 & 0.25 & 22777 & (4 : 9) \\
+4200.3 & 0.5 & 22781 & (4 : 11) \\
+\end{array}
+\]
+\end{table}
+\PageSep{17}
+
+The values of the products are seen to be very nearly equal,
+while the deviations are of the same order of magnitude as the
+limits of experimental error. The value of the product
+\[
+\lambda \left(\frac{1}{n_{1}^{2}} - \frac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right)
+\]
+should for this spectrum, according to the formula~\Eq{(9)}, be exactly
+$\frac{1}{4}$~of the corresponding product for the hydrogen spectrum. From
+the tables on pages \PageNum{1} and~\PageNum{16} we find for these products $91153$
+and $22779$, and dividing the former by the latter we get $4.0016$.
+This value is very nearly equal to~$4$; the deviation is, however,
+much greater than can be accounted for in any way by the errors
+of the experiments. It has been easy, however, to find a theoretical
+explanation of this point. In all the foregoing calculations
+we have assumed that the mass of the nucleus is infinitely great
+compared to that of the electron. This is of course not the
+case, even though it holds to a very close approximation; for a
+hydrogen atom the ratio of the mass of the nucleus to that of the
+electron will be about $1850$ and for a helium atom four times as
+great.
+
+If we consider a system consisting of an electron revolving about
+a nucleus with a charge~$Ne$ and a mass~$M$, we find the following
+expression for the frequency of revolution of the system:
+\[
+\omega^{2} = \frac{2}{\pi^{2}}\, \frac{W^{3} (M + m)}{N^{2} e^{4} Mm}.
+\]
+
+From this formula we find in a manner quite similar to that
+previously employed that the system will emit a line spectrum,
+the wave lengths of which are given by the formula
+\[
+\frac{1}{\lambda}
+ = \frac{2\pi^{2} N^{2} e^{4} mM}{ch^{3} (M + m)}
+ \left(\frac{1}{n_{1}^{2}} - \frac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right).
+\Tag{(10)}
+\]
+
+If with the aid of this formula we try to find the ratio of the
+product for the hydrogen spectrum, to that of the hypothetical
+helium spectrum we get the value $4.00163$ which is in complete
+agreement with the preceding value calculated from the experimental
+observations.
+
+I must further mention that Evans has made some experiments
+to determine whether the spectrum in question is due to hydrogen
+or helium. He succeeded in observing one of the lines in very
+\PageSep{18}
+pure helium; there was, at any rate, not enough hydrogen present
+to enable the hydrogen lines to be observed. Since in any event
+Fowler does not seem to consider such evidence as conclusive it is
+to be hoped that these experiments will be continued. There is,
+however, also another possibility of deciding this question. As is
+evident from the formula~\Eq{(10)}, the helium spectrum under consideration
+should contain, besides the lines observed by Fowler, a
+series of lines lying close to the ordinary hydrogen lines. These
+lines may be obtained by putting $n_{1} = 4$, $n_{2} = 6$, $8$, $10$,~etc. Even
+if these lines were present, it would be extremely difficult to
+observe them on account of their position with regard to the
+hydrogen lines, but should they be observed this would probably
+also settle the question of the origin of the spectrum, since no
+reason would seem to be left to assume the spectrum to be due to
+hydrogen.
+
+\Section{Other spectra.} For the spectra of other elements the problem
+becomes more complicated, since the atoms contain a larger
+number of electrons. It has not yet been possible on the basis of
+this theory to explain any other spectra besides those which I
+have already mentioned. On the other hand it ought to be
+mentioned that the general laws applying to the spectra are very
+simply interpreted on the basis of our assumptions. So far as the
+combination principle is concerned its explanation is obvious. In
+the method we have employed our point of departure was largely
+determined by this particular principle. But a simple explanation
+can be also given of the other general law, namely, the occurrence
+of Rydberg's constant in all spectral formulae. Let us assume
+that the spectra under consideration, like the spectrum of hydrogen,
+are emitted by a neutral system, and that they are produced by
+the binding of an electron previously removed from the system.
+If such an electron revolves about the nucleus in an orbit which
+is large in proportion to that of the other electrons it will be
+subjected to forces much the same as the electron in a hydrogen
+atom, since the inner electrons individually will approximately
+neutralize the effect of a part of the positive charge of the nucleus.
+We may therefore assume that for this system there will exist a
+series of stationary states in which the motion of the outermost
+\PageSep{19}
+electron is approximately the same as in the stationary states of a
+hydrogen atom. I shall not discuss these matters any further,
+but shall only mention that they lead to the conclusion that
+Rydberg's constant is not exactly the same for all elements.
+The expression for this constant will in fact contain the factor
+$\dfrac{M}{M + m}$, where $M$~is the mass of the nucleus. The correction is
+exceedingly small for elements of large atomic weight, but for
+hydrogen it is, from the point of view of spectrum analysis, very
+considerable. If the procedure employed leads to correct results, it
+is not therefore permissible to calculate Rydberg's constant directly
+from the hydrogen spectrum; the value of the universal constant
+should according to the theory be~$109735$ and not~$109675$.
+
+I shall not tire you any further with more details; I hope to
+return to these questions here in the Physical Society, and to
+show how, on the basis of the underlying ideas, it is possible
+to develop a theory for the structure of atoms and molecules.
+Before closing I only wish to say that I hope I have expressed
+myself sufficiently clearly so that you have appreciated the extent
+to which these considerations conflict with the admirably coherent
+group of conceptions which have been rightly termed the classical
+theory of electrodynamics. On the other hand, by emphasizing
+this conflict, I have tried to convey to you the impression that it
+may be also possible in the course of time to discover a certain
+coherence in the new ideas.
+\PageSep{20}
+
+
+\Essay{II}{On the Series Spectra of the Elements}
+ {Address delivered before the Physical Society in Berlin, April~27, 1920.}
+
+\Chapter{I.}{Introduction}
+
+The subject on which I have the honour to speak here, at the
+kind invitation of the Council of your society, is very extensive and
+it would be impossible in a single address to give a comprehensive
+survey of even the most important results obtained in the theory
+of spectra. In what follows I shall try merely to emphasize some
+points of view which seem to me important when considering the
+present state of the theory of spectra and the possibilities of its
+development in the near future. I regret in this connection not to
+have time to describe the history of the development of spectral
+theories, although this would be of interest for our purpose. No
+difficulty, however, in understanding this lecture need be experienced
+on this account, since the points of view underlying previous
+attempts to explain the spectra differ fundamentally from those upon
+which the following considerations rest. This difference exists both
+in the development of our ideas about the structure of the atom
+and in the manner in which these ideas are used in explaining the
+spectra.
+
+We shall assume, according to Rutherford's theory, that an atom
+consists of a positively charged nucleus with a number of electrons
+revolving about it. Although the nucleus is assumed to be very
+small in proportion to the size of the whole atom, it will contain
+nearly the entire mass of the atom. I shall not state the reasons
+which led to the establishment of this nuclear theory of the atom,
+nor describe the very strong support which this theory has received
+from very different sources. I shall mention only that result
+which lends such charm and simplicity to the modern development
+of the atomic theory. I refer to the idea that the number of electrons
+in a neutral atom is exactly equal to the number, giving the
+position of the element in the periodic table, the so-called ``atomic
+number.'' This assumption, which was first proposed by van~den
+Broek, immediately suggests the possibility ultimately of deriving
+\PageSep{21}
+the explanation of the physical and chemical properties of the
+elements from their atomic numbers. If, however, an explanation
+of this kind is attempted on the basis of the classical laws of
+mechanics and electrodynamics, insurmountable difficulties are encountered.
+These difficulties become especially apparent when we
+consider the spectra of the elements. In fact, the difficulties are
+here so obvious that it would be a waste of time to discuss them in
+detail. It is evident that systems like the nuclear atom, if based
+upon the usual mechanical and electrodynamical conceptions,
+would not even possess sufficient stability to give a spectrum consisting
+of sharp lines.
+
+In this lecture I shall use the ideas of the quantum theory. It
+will not be necessary, particularly here in Berlin, to consider in
+detail how Planck's fundamental work on temperature radiation
+has given rise to this theory, according to which the laws governing
+atomic processes exhibit a definite element of discontinuity. I shall
+mention only Planck's chief result about the properties of an exceedingly
+simple kind of atomic system, the Planck ``oscillator.''
+This consists of an electrically charged particle which can execute
+harmonic oscillations about its position of equilibrium with a frequency
+independent of the amplitude. By studying the statistical
+equilibrium of a number of such systems in a field of radiation
+Planck was led to the conclusion that the emission and absorption
+of radiation take place in such a manner, that, so far as a statistical
+equilibrium is concerned only certain distinctive states of the
+oscillator are to be taken into consideration. In these states the
+energy of the system is equal to a whole multiple of a so-called
+``energy quantum,'' which was found to be proportional to the frequency
+of the oscillator. The particular energy values are therefore
+given by the well-known formula
+\[
+E_{n} = nh\omega,
+\Tag{(1)}
+\]
+where $n$~is a whole number, $\omega$~the frequency of vibration of the
+oscillator, and $h$~is Planck's constant.
+
+If we attempt to use this result to explain the spectra of the
+elements, however, we encounter difficulties, because the motion of
+the particles in the atom, in spite of its simple structure, is in general
+exceedingly complicated compared with the motion of a Planck
+\PageSep{22}
+oscillator. The question then arises, how Planck's result ought to
+be generalized in order to make its application possible. Different
+points of view immediately suggest themselves. Thus we might
+regard this equation as a relation expressing certain characteristic
+properties of the distinctive motions of an atomic system and try
+to obtain the general form of these properties. On the other hand,
+we may also regard equation~\Eq{(1)} as a statement about a property
+of the process of radiation and inquire into the general laws which
+control this process.
+
+In Planck's theory it is taken for granted that the frequency of
+the radiation emitted and absorbed by the oscillator is equal to its
+own frequency, an assumption which may be written
+\[
+\nu \equiv \omega,
+\Tag{(2)}
+\]
+if in order to make a sharp distinction between the frequency of
+the emitted radiation and the frequency of the particles in the atoms,
+we here and in the following denote the former by~$\nu$ and the latter
+by~$\omega$. We see, therefore, that Planck's result may be interpreted to
+mean, that the oscillator can emit and absorb radiation only in
+``radiation quanta'' of magnitude
+\[
+\Delta E = h\nu.
+\Tag{(3)}
+\]
+It is well known that ideas of this kind led Einstein to a theory
+of the photoelectric effect. This is of great importance, since it
+represents the first instance in which the quantum theory was
+applied to a phenomenon of non-statistical character. I shall not
+here discuss the familiar difficulties to which the ``hypothesis of
+light quanta'' leads in connection with the phenomena of interference,
+for the explanation of which the classical theory of radiation
+has shown itself to be so remarkably suited. Above all I shall not
+consider the problem of the nature of radiation, I shall only attempt
+to show how it has been possible in a purely formal manner to
+develop a spectral theory, the essential elements of which may be
+considered as a simultaneous rational development of the two ways
+of interpreting Planck's result.
+\PageSep{23}
+
+
+\Chapter{II.}{General Principles of the Quantum Theory
+of\protect~Spectra}
+
+In order to explain the appearance of line spectra we are compelled
+to assume that the emission of radiation by an atomic system
+takes place in such a manner that it is not possible to follow the
+emission in detail by means of the usual conceptions. Indeed, these
+do not even offer us the means of calculating the frequency of the
+emitted radiation. We shall see, however, that it is possible to give
+a very simple explanation of the general empirical laws for the
+frequencies of the spectral lines, if for each emission of radiation
+by the atom we assume the fundamental law to hold, that during
+the entire period of the emission the radiation possesses one and
+the same frequency~$\nu$, connected with the total energy emitted by
+the \emph{frequency relation}
+\[
+h\nu = E' - E''.
+\Tag{(4)}
+\]
+Here $E'$~and $E''$ represent the energy of the system before and
+after the emission.
+
+If this law is assumed, the spectra do not give us information
+about the motion of the particles in the atom, as is supposed in the
+usual theory of radiation, but only a knowledge of the energy
+changes in the various processes which can occur in the atom.
+From this point of view the spectra show the existence of certain,
+definite energy values corresponding to certain distinctive states
+of the atoms. These states will be called the \emph{stationary states} of
+the atoms, since we shall assume that the atom can remain a finite
+time in each state, and can leave this state only by a process of
+transition to another stationary state. Notwithstanding the fundamental
+departure from the ordinary mechanical and electrodynamical
+conceptions, we shall see, however, that it is possible to give a
+rational interpretation of the evidence provided by the spectra on
+the basis of these ideas.
+
+Although we must assume that the ordinary mechanics \Chg{can not}{cannot}
+be used to describe the transitions between the stationary states,
+nevertheless, it has been found possible to develop a consistent
+theory on the assumption that the motion in these states can be
+described by the use of the ordinary mechanics. Moreover, although
+the process of radiation \Chg{can not}{cannot} be described on the basis of the
+\PageSep{24}
+ordinary theory of electrodynamics, according to which the nature
+of the radiation emitted by an atom is directly related to the harmonic
+components occurring in the motion of the system, there is
+found, nevertheless, to exist a far-reaching \emph{correspondence} between
+the various types of possible transitions between the stationary
+states on the one hand and the various harmonic components of the
+motion on the other hand. This correspondence is of such a nature,
+that the present theory of spectra is in a certain sense to be regarded
+as a rational generalization of the ordinary theory of radiation.
+
+\Section{Hydrogen spectrum.} In order that the principal points may
+stand out as clearly as possible I shall, before considering the more
+complicated types of series spectra, first consider the simplest spectrum,
+namely, the series spectrum of hydrogen. This spectrum
+consists of a number of lines whose frequencies are given with great
+exactness by Balmer's formula
+\[
+\nu = \frac{K}{(n'')^{2}} - \frac{K}{(n')^{2}},
+\Tag{(5)}
+\]
+where $K$~is a constant, and $n'$~and $n''$ are whole numbers. If we put
+$n'' = 2$ and give to~$n'$ the values $3$,~$4$,~etc., we get the well-known
+Balmer series of hydrogen. If we put $n'' = 1$ or $n'' = 3$ we obtain
+respectively the ultra-violet and infra-red series. We shall assume
+the hydrogen atom simply to consist of a positively charged nucleus
+with a single electron revolving about it. For the sake of simplicity
+we shall suppose the mass of the nucleus to be infinite in comparison
+with the mass of the electron, and further we shall disregard the
+small variations in the motion due to the change in mass of the
+electron with its velocity. With these simplifications the electron
+will describe a closed elliptical orbit with the nucleus at one of the
+foci. The frequency of revolution~$\omega$ and the major axis~$2a$ of the
+orbit will be connected with the energy of the system by the following
+equations:
+\[
+\omega = \sqrt{\frac{2W^{3}}{\pi^{2} e^{4} m}},\quad
+2a = \frac{e^{2}}{W}.
+\Tag{(6)}
+\]
+Here $e$~is the charge of the electron and $m$~its mass, while $W$~is the
+work required to remove the electron to infinity.
+
+The simplicity of these formulae suggests the possibility of using
+them in an attempt to explain the spectrum of hydrogen. This,
+\PageSep{25}
+however, is not possible so long as we use the classical theory of
+radiation. It would not even be possible to understand how hydrogen
+could emit a spectrum consisting of sharp lines; for since $\omega$~varies
+with~$W$, the frequency of the emitted radiation would vary continuously
+during the emission. We can avoid these difficulties if
+we use the ideas of the quantum theory. If for each line we form
+the product~$h\nu$ by multiplying both sides of~\Eq{(5)} by~$h$, then, since
+the right-hand side of the resulting relation may be written as
+the difference of two simple expressions, we are led by comparison
+with formula~\Eq{(4)} to the assumption that the separate lines of the
+spectrum will be emitted by transitions between two stationary
+states, forming members of an infinite series of states, in which the
+energy in the $n$th~state apart from an arbitrary additive constant is
+determined by the expression
+\[
+E_{n} = -\frac{Kh}{n^{2}}.
+\Tag{(7)}
+\]
+The negative sign has been chosen because the energy of the atom
+will be most simply characterized by the work~$W$ required to remove
+the electron completely from the atom. If we now substitute $\dfrac{Kh}{n^{2}}$
+for~$W$ in formula~\Eq{(6)}, we obtain the following expression for the frequency
+and the major axis in the $n$th~stationary state:
+\[
+\omega_{n} = \frac{1}{n^{3}} \sqrt{\frac{2h^{3} K^{3}}{\pi^{2} e^{4} m}},\quad
+2a_{n} = \frac{n^{2} e^{2}}{hK}.
+\Tag{(8)}
+\]
+A comparison between the motions determined by these equations
+and the distinctive states of a Planck resonator may be shown to
+offer a theoretical determination of the constant~$K$. Instead of
+doing this I shall show how the value of~$K$ can be found by a simple
+comparison of the spectrum emitted with the motion in the stationary
+states, a comparison which at the same time will lead us to the
+principle of correspondence.
+
+We have assumed that each hydrogen line is the result of a
+transition between two stationary states of the atom corresponding
+to different values of~$n$. Equations~\Eq{(8)} show that the frequency of
+revolution and the major axis of the orbit can be entirely different
+in the two states, since, as the energy decreases, the major axis of
+the orbit becomes smaller and the frequency of revolution increases.
+\PageSep{26}
+In general, therefore, it will be impossible to obtain a relation between
+the frequency of revolution of the electrons and the frequency
+of the radiation as in the ordinary theory of radiation. If, however,
+we consider the ratio of the frequencies of revolution in two stationary
+states corresponding to given values of $n'$~and~$n''$, we see that this
+ratio approaches unity as $n'$~and $n''$ gradually increase, if at the
+same time the difference $n' - n''$ remains unchanged. By considering
+transitions corresponding to large values of $n'$~and~$n''$ we may
+therefore hope to establish a certain connection with the ordinary
+theory. For the frequency of the radiation emitted by a transition,
+we get according to~\Eq{(5)}
+\[
+\nu = \frac{K}{(n'')^{2}} - \frac{K}{(n')^{2}}
+ = (n' - n'') K\, \frac{n' + n''}{(n')^{2} (n'')^{2}}.
+\Tag{(9)}
+\]
+If now the numbers $n'$~and $n''$ are large in proportion to their difference,
+we see that by equations~\Eq{(8)} this expression may be written
+approximately,
+\[
+\nu \sim (n' - n'') \omega \sqrt{\frac{2\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{Kh^{3}}},
+\Tag{(10)}
+\]
+where $\omega$~represents the frequency of revolution in the one or the
+other of the two stationary states. Since $n' - n''$ is a whole number,
+we see that the first part of this expression, \ie\ $(n' - n'')\omega$, is the
+same as the frequency of one of the harmonic components into
+which the elliptical motion may be decomposed. This involves the
+well-known result that for a system of particles having a periodic
+motion of frequency~$\omega$, the displacement~$\xi$ of the particles in a given
+direction in space may be represented as a function of the time by
+a trigonometric series of the form
+\[
+\xi = \sum C_{\tau} \cos 2\pi(\tau\omega t + c_{\tau}),
+\Tag{(11)}
+\]
+where the summation is to be extended over all positive integral
+values of~$\tau$.
+
+We see, therefore, that the frequency of the radiation emitted
+by a transition between two stationary states, for which the numbers
+$n'$~and $n''$ are large in proportion to their difference, will coincide
+with the frequency of one of the components of the radiation, which
+according to the ordinary ideas of radiation would be expected from
+the motion of the atom in these states, provided the last factor on
+\PageSep{27}
+the right-hand side of equation~\Eq{(10)} is equal to~$1$. This condition,
+which is identical to the condition
+\[
+K = \frac{2\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{3}},
+\Tag{(12)}
+\]
+is in fact fulfilled, if we give to~$K$ its value as found from measurements
+on the hydrogen spectrum, and if for $e$,~$m$ and~$h$ we use the
+values obtained directly from experiment. This agreement clearly
+gives us a \emph{connection between the spectrum and the atomic model of
+hydrogen}, which is as close as could reasonably be expected considering
+the fundamental difference between the ideas of the quantum
+theory and of the ordinary theory of radiation.
+
+\Section{The correspondence principle.} Let us now consider somewhat
+more closely this relation between the spectra one would expect on
+the basis of the quantum theory, and on the ordinary theory of
+radiation. The frequencies of the spectral lines calculated according
+to both methods agree completely in the region where the stationary
+states deviate only little from one another. We must not forget,
+however, that the mechanism of emission in both cases is different.
+The different frequencies corresponding to the various harmonic
+components of the motion are emitted simultaneously according to
+the ordinary theory of radiation and with a relative intensity depending
+directly upon the ratio of the amplitudes of these oscillations.
+But according to the quantum theory the various spectral
+lines are emitted by entirely distinct processes, consisting of transitions
+from one stationary state to various adjacent states, so that
+the radiation corresponding to the $\tau$th~``harmonic'' will be emitted
+by a transition for which $n' - n'' = \tau$. The relative intensity
+with which each particular line is emitted depends consequently
+upon the relative probability of the occurrence of the different
+transitions.
+
+This correspondence between the frequencies determined by the
+two methods must have a deeper significance and we are led to
+anticipate that it will also apply to the intensities. This is equivalent
+to the statement that, when the quantum numbers are large,
+the relative probability of a particular transition is connected in a
+simple manner with the amplitude of the corresponding harmonic
+component in the motion.
+\PageSep{28}
+
+This peculiar relation suggests a \emph{general law for the occurrence
+of transitions between stationary states}. Thus we shall assume that
+even when the quantum numbers are small the possibility of
+transition between two stationary states is connected with the
+presence of a certain harmonic component in the motion of the
+system. If the numbers $n'$~and $n''$ are not large in proportion to
+their difference, the numerical value of the amplitudes of these
+components in the two stationary states may be entirely different.
+We must be prepared to find, therefore, that the exact connection
+between the probability of a transition and the amplitude of the
+corresponding harmonic component in the motion is in general
+complicated like the connection between the frequency of the radiation
+and that of the component. From this point of view, for
+example, the green line~$H_{\beta}$ of the hydrogen spectrum which corresponds
+to a transition from the fourth to the second stationary
+state may be considered in a certain sense to be an ``octave'' of the
+red line~$H_{\alpha}$, corresponding to a transition from the third to the
+second state, even though the frequency of the first line is by no
+means twice as great as that of the latter. In fact, the transition
+giving rise to~$H_{\beta}$ may be regarded as due to the presence of a harmonic
+oscillation in the motion of the atom, which is an octave
+higher than the oscillation giving rise to the emission of~$H_{\alpha}$.
+
+Before considering other spectra, where numerous opportunities
+will be found to use this point of view, I shall briefly mention an
+interesting application to the Planck oscillator. If from \Eq{(1)}~and \Eq{(4)}
+we calculate the frequency, which would correspond to a transition
+between two particular states of such an oscillator, we find
+\[
+\nu = (n' - n'')\omega,
+\Tag{(13)}
+\]
+where $n'$~and $n''$ are the numbers characterizing the states. It was
+an essential assumption in Planck's theory that the frequency of
+the radiation emitted and absorbed by the oscillator is always equal
+to~$\omega$. We see that this assumption is equivalent to the assertion
+that transitions occur only between two successive stationary states
+in sharp contrast to the hydrogen atom. According to our view,
+however, this was exactly what might have been expected, for we
+must assume that the essential difference between the oscillator
+and the hydrogen atom is that the motion of the oscillator is simple
+\PageSep{29}
+harmonic. We can see that it is possible to develop a formal theory
+of radiation, in which the spectrum of hydrogen and the simple
+spectrum of a Planck oscillator appear completely analogous. This
+theory can only be formulated by one and the same condition for
+a system as simple as the oscillator. In general this condition
+breaks up into two parts, one concerning the fixation of the stationary
+states, and the other relating to the frequency of the radiation
+emitted by a transition between these states.
+
+\Section{General spectral laws.} Although the series spectra of the
+elements of higher atomic number have a more complicated structure
+than the hydrogen spectrum, simple laws have been discovered
+showing a remarkable analogy to the Balmer formula. Rydberg
+and Ritz showed that the frequencies in the series spectra of many
+elements can be expressed by a formula of the type
+\[
+\nu = f_{k''}(n'') - f_{k'}(n'),
+\Tag{(14)}
+\]
+where $n'$~and $n''$ are two whole numbers and $f_{k'}$~and $f_{k''}$ are two
+functions belonging to a series of functions characteristic of the
+element. These functions vary in a simple manner with~$n$ and in
+particular converge to zero for increasing values of~$n$. The various
+series of lines are obtained from this formula by allowing the first
+term~$f_{k''}(n'')$ to remain constant, while a series of consecutive whole
+numbers are substituted for~$n'$ in the second term~$f_{k'}(n')$. According
+to the Ritz \emph{combination principle} the entire spectrum may then
+be obtained by forming every possible combination of two values
+among all the quantities~$f_{k}(n)$.
+
+The fact that the frequency of each line of the spectrum may be
+written as the difference of two simple expressions depending upon
+whole numbers suggests at once that the terms on the right-hand
+side multiplied by~$h$ may be placed equal to the energy in the
+various stationary states of the atom. The existence in the spectra
+of the other elements of a number of separate functions of~$n$ compels
+us to assume the presence not of one but of a number of series of
+stationary states, the energy of the $n$th~state of the $k$th~series apart
+from an arbitrary additive constant being given by
+\[
+E_{k}(n) = -h f_{k}(n).
+\Tag{(15)}
+\]
+This complicated character of the ensemble of stationary states of
+atoms of higher atomic number is exactly what was to be expected
+\PageSep{30}
+from the relation between the spectra calculated on the quantum
+theory, and the decomposition of the motions of the atoms into
+harmonic oscillations. From this point of view we may regard the
+simple character of the stationary states of the hydrogen atom as
+intimately connected with the simple periodic character of this
+atom. Where the neutral atom contains more than one electron, we
+find much more complicated motions with correspondingly complicated
+harmonic components. We must therefore expect a more
+complicated ensemble of stationary states, if we are still to have a
+corresponding relation between the motions in the atom and the
+spectrum. In the course of the lecture we shall trace this correspondence
+in detail, and we shall be led to a simple explanation of
+the apparent capriciousness in the occurrence of lines predicted by
+the combination principle.
+
+The following figure gives a survey of the stationary states of
+the sodium atom deduced from the series terms.
+\Figure[Diagram of the series spectrum of sodium.]{}{30}
+
+The stationary states are represented by black dots whose distance
+from the vertical line a---a is proportional to the numerical value
+of the energy in the states. The arrows in the figure indicate the
+transitions giving those lines of the sodium spectrum which appear
+under the usual conditions of excitation. The arrangement of the
+states in horizontal rows corresponds to the ordinary arrangement
+of the ``spectral terms'' in the spectroscopic tables. Thus, the states
+in the first row~($S$) correspond to the variable term in the ``sharp
+series,'' the lines of which are emitted by transitions from these
+states to the first state in the second row. The states in the second
+\PageSep{31}
+row~($P$) correspond to the variable term in the ``principal series''
+which is emitted by transitions from these states to the first state
+in the $S$~row. The $D$~states correspond to the variable term in the
+``diffuse series,'' which like the sharp series is emitted by transitions
+to the first state in the $P$~row, and finally the $B$~states correspond
+to the variable term in the ``Bergmann'' series (fundamental series),
+in which transitions take place to the first state in the $D$~row. The
+manner in which the various rows are arranged with reference to
+one another will be used to illustrate the more detailed theory
+which will be discussed later. The apparent capriciousness of the
+combination principle, which I mentioned, consists in the fact that
+under the usual conditions of excitation not all the lines belonging
+to possible combinations of the terms of the sodium spectrum appear,
+but only those indicated in the figure by arrows.
+
+The general question of the fixation of the stationary states of
+an atom containing several electrons presents difficulties of a profound
+character which are perhaps still far from completely solved.
+It is possible, however, to obtain an immediate insight into the
+stationary states involved in the emission of the series spectra by
+considering the empirical laws which have been discovered about
+the spectral terms. According to the well-known law discovered by
+Rydberg for the spectra of elements emitted under the usual conditions
+of excitation the functions~$f_{k}(n)$ appearing in formula~\Eq{(14)}
+can be written in the form
+\[
+f_{k}(n) = \frac{K}{n^{2}} \phi_{k}(n),
+\Tag{(16)}
+\]
+where $\phi_{k}(n)$~represents a function which converges to unity for
+large values of~$n$. $K$~is the same constant which appears in formula~\Eq{(5)}
+for the spectrum of hydrogen. This result must evidently be
+explained by supposing the atom to be electrically neutral in these
+states and one electron to be moving round the nucleus in an orbit
+the dimensions of which are very large in proportion to the distance
+of the other electrons from the nucleus. We see, indeed, that in
+this case the electric force acting on the outer electron will to a
+first approximation be the same as that acting upon the electron
+in the hydrogen atom, and the approximation will be the better
+the larger the orbit.
+\PageSep{32}
+
+On account of the limited time I shall not discuss how this
+explanation of the universal appearance of Rydberg's constant in
+the arc spectra is convincingly supported by the investigation of
+the ``spark spectra.'' These are emitted by the elements under the
+influence of very strong electrical discharges, and come from ionized
+not neutral atoms. It is important, however, that I should indicate
+briefly how the fundamental ideas of the theory and the assumption
+that in the states corresponding to the spectra one electron moves
+in an orbit around the others, are both supported by investigations
+on selective absorption and the excitation of spectral lines by
+bombardment by electrons.
+
+\Section{Absorption and excitation of radiation.}\Pagelabel{32} Just as we have
+assumed that each emission of radiation is due to a transition from
+a stationary state of higher to one of lower energy, so also we must
+assume absorption of radiation by the atom to be due to a transition
+in the opposite direction. For an element to absorb light corresponding
+to a given line in its series spectrum, it is therefore
+necessary for the atom of this element to be in that one of the two
+states connected with the line possessing the smaller energy value.
+If we now consider an element whose atoms in the gaseous state
+do not combine into molecules, it will be necessary to assume that
+under ordinary conditions nearly all the atoms exist in that stationary
+state in which the value of the energy is a minimum. This state
+I shall call the \emph{normal state}. We must therefore expect that the
+absorption spectrum of a monatomic gas will contain only those
+lines of the series spectrum, whose emission corresponds to transitions
+to the normal state. This expectation is completely confirmed
+by the spectra of the alkali metals. The absorption spectrum of
+sodium vapour, for example, exhibits lines corresponding only to
+the principal series, which as mentioned in the description of the
+figure corresponds with transitions to the state of minimum energy.
+Further confirmation of this view of the process of absorption is
+given by experiments on \emph{resonance radiation}. Wood first showed
+that sodium vapour subjected to light corresponding to the first
+line of the principal series---the familiar yellow line---acquires the
+ability of again emitting a radiation consisting only of the light of
+this line. We can explain this by supposing the sodium atom to
+\PageSep{33}
+have been transferred from the normal state to the first state in
+the second row. The fact that the resonance radiation does not
+exhibit the same degree of polarization as the incident light is
+in perfect agreement with our assumption that the radiation from
+the excited vapour is not a resonance phenomenon in the sense of
+the ordinary theory of radiation, but on the contrary depends on a
+process which is not directly connected with the incident radiation.
+
+The phenomenon of the resonance radiation of the yellow sodium
+line is, however, not quite so simple as I have indicated, since, as
+you know, this line is really a doublet. This means that the variable
+terms of the principal series are not simple but are represented by
+two values slightly different from one another. According to our
+picture of the origin of the sodium spectrum this means that the
+$P$~states in the second row in the figure---as opposed to the $S$~states
+in the first row---are not simple, but that for each place in this row
+there are two stationary states. The energy values differ so little
+from one another that it is impossible to represent them in the
+figure as separate dots. The emission (and absorption) of the two
+components of the yellow line are, therefore, connected with two
+different processes. This was beautifully shown by some later researches
+of Wood and Dunoyer. They found that if sodium vapour
+is subjected to radiation from only one of the two components of
+the yellow line, the resonance radiation, at least at low pressures,
+consists only of this component. These experiments were later
+continued by Strutt, and were extended to the case where the
+exciting line corresponded to the second line in the principal series.
+Strutt found that the resonance radiation consisted apparently only
+to a small extent of light of the same frequency as the incident
+light, while the greater part consisted of the familiar yellow line.
+This result must appear very astonishing on the ordinary ideas of
+resonance, since, as Strutt pointed out, no rational connection exists
+between the frequencies of the first and second lines of the principal
+series. It is however easily explained from our point of view. From
+the figure it can be seen that when an atom has been transferred
+into the second state in the second row, in addition to the direct
+return to the normal state, there are still two other transitions
+which may give rise to radiation, namely the transitions to the
+second state in the first row and to the first state in the third row.
+\PageSep{34}
+The experiments seem to indicate that the second of these three
+transitions is most probable, and I shall show later that there is
+some theoretical justification for this conclusion. By this transition,
+which results in the emission of an infra-red line which could not
+be observed with the experimental arrangement, the atom is taken
+to the second state of the first row, and from this state only
+one transition is possible, which again gives an infra-red line. This
+transition takes the atom to the first state in the second row, and
+the subsequent transition to the normal state then gives rise to the
+yellow line. Strutt discovered another equally surprising result,
+that this yellow resonance radiation seemed to consist of both
+components of the first line of the principal series, even when the
+incident light consisted of only one component of the second line
+of the principal series. This is in beautiful agreement with our
+picture of the phenomenon. We must remember that the states in
+the first row are simple, so when the atom has arrived in one of
+these it has lost every possibility of later giving any indication
+from which of the two states in the second row it originally came.
+
+Sodium vapour, in addition to the absorption corresponding to
+the lines of the principal series, exhibits a \emph{selective absorption in a
+continuous spectral region} beginning at the limit of this series and
+extending into the ultra\Add{-}violet. This confirms in a striking manner
+our assumption that the absorption of the lines of the principal
+series of sodium results in final states of the atom in which one of
+the electrons revolves in larger and larger orbits. For we must
+assume that this continuous absorption corresponds to transitions
+from the normal state to states in which the electron is in a position
+to remove itself infinitely far from the nucleus. This phenomenon
+exhibits a complete analogy with the \emph{photoelectric effect} from an
+illuminated metal plate in which, by using light of a suitable
+frequency, electrons of any velocity can be obtained. The frequency,
+however, must always lie above a certain limit connected according
+to Einstein's theory in a simple manner with the energy necessary
+to bring an electron out of the metal.
+
+This view of the origin of the emission and absorption spectra
+has been confirmed in a very interesting manner by experiments
+on the \emph{excitation of spectral lines and production of ionization by
+electron bombardment}. The chief advance in this field is due to the
+\PageSep{35}
+well-known experiments of Franck and Hertz. These investigators
+obtained their first important results from their experiments on
+mercury vapour, whose properties particularly facilitate such experiments.
+On account of the great importance of the results, these
+experiments have been extended to most gases and metals that can
+be obtained in a gaseous state. With the aid of the figure I shall
+briefly illustrate the results for the case of sodium vapour. It was
+found that the electrons upon colliding with the atoms were thrown
+back with undiminished velocity when their energy was less than
+that required to transfer the atom from the normal state to the
+next succeeding stationary state of higher energy value. In the
+case of sodium vapour this means from the first state in the first
+row to the first state in the second row. As soon, however, as the
+energy of the electron reaches this critical value, a new type of
+collision takes place, in which the electron loses all its kinetic
+energy, while at the same time the vapour is excited and emits a
+radiation corresponding to the yellow line. This is what would be
+expected, if by the collision the atom was transferred from the
+normal state to the first one in the second row. For some time it
+was uncertain to what extent this explanation was correct, since
+in the experiments on mercury vapour it was found that, together
+with the occurrence of non-elastic impacts, ions were always formed
+in the vapour. From our figure, however, we would expect ions
+to be produced only when the kinetic energy of the electrons is
+sufficiently great to bring the atom out of the normal state to the
+common limit of the states. Later experiments, especially by Davis
+and Goucher, have settled this point. It has been shown that ions
+can only be directly produced by collisions when the kinetic energy
+of the electrons corresponds to the limit of the series, and that the
+ionization found at first was an indirect effect arising from the
+photoelectric effect produced at the metal walls of the apparatus
+by the radiation arising from the return of the mercury atoms to
+the normal state. These experiments provide a direct and independent
+proof of the reality of the distinctive stationary states,
+whose existence we were led to infer from the series spectra. At
+the same time we get a striking impression of the insufficiency of
+the ordinary electrodynamical and mechanical conceptions for the
+description of atomic processes, not only as regards the emission
+\PageSep{36}
+of radiation but also in such phenomena as the collision of free
+electrons with atoms.
+
+
+\Chapter{III.}{Development of the Quantum Theory
+of Spectra}
+
+We see that it is possible by making use of a few simple ideas
+to obtain a certain insight into the origin of the series spectra.
+But when we attempt to penetrate more deeply, difficulties arise.
+In fact, for systems which are not simply periodic it is not possible
+to obtain sufficient information about the motions of these systems
+in the stationary states from the numerical values of the energy
+alone; more determining factors are required for the fixation of
+the motion. We meet the same difficulties when we try to explain
+in detail the characteristic effect of external forces upon the spectrum
+of hydrogen. A foundation for further advances in this field has
+been made in recent years through a development of the quantum
+theory, which allows a fixation of the stationary states not only in
+the case of simple periodic systems, but also for certain classes of
+non-periodic systems. These are the \emph{conditionally periodic systems}
+whose equations of motion can be solved by a ``separation of the
+variables.'' If generalized coordinates are used the description of
+the motion of these systems can be reduced to the consideration
+of a number of generalized ``components of motion.'' Each of these
+corresponds to the change of only one of the coordinates and may
+therefore in a certain sense be regarded as ``independent.'' The
+method for the fixation of the stationary states consists in fixing
+the motion of each of these components by a condition, which can
+be considered as a direct generalization of condition~\Eq{(1)} for a
+Planck oscillator, so that the stationary states are in general
+characterized by as many whole numbers as the number of the
+degrees of freedom which the system possesses. A considerable
+number of physicists have taken part in this development of the
+quantum theory, including Planck himself. I also wish to mention
+the important contribution made by Ehrenfest to this subject on
+the limitations of the applicability of the laws of mechanics to
+atomic processes. The decisive advance in the application of the
+quantum theory to spectra, however, is due to Sommerfeld and his
+followers. However, I shall not further discuss the systematic form
+\PageSep{37}
+in which these authors have presented their results. In a paper which
+appeared some time ago in the Transactions of the Copenhagen
+Academy, I have shown that the spectra, calculated with the aid
+of this method for the fixation of the stationary states, exhibit a
+correspondence with the spectra which should correspond to the
+motion of the system similar to that which we have already considered
+in the case of hydrogen. With the aid of this general
+correspondence I shall try in the remainder of this lecture to
+show how it is possible to present the theory of series spectra
+and the effects produced by external fields of force upon these
+spectra in a form which may be considered as the natural generalization
+of the foregoing considerations. This form appears to me
+to be especially suited for future work in the theory of spectra,
+since it allows of an immediate insight into problems for which
+the methods mentioned above fail on account of the complexity of
+the motions in the atom.
+
+\Section{Effect of external forces on the hydrogen spectrum.} We
+shall now proceed to investigate the effect of small perturbing
+forces upon the spectrum of the simple system consisting of a single
+electron revolving about a nucleus. For the sake of simplicity we
+shall for the moment disregard the variation of the mass of the
+electron with its velocity. The consideration of the small changes
+in the motion due to this variation has been of great importance
+in the development of Sommerfeld's theory which originated in the
+explanation of the \emph{fine structure of the hydrogen lines}. This fine
+structure is due to the fact, that taking into account the variation
+of mass with velocity the orbit of the electron deviates a little
+from a simple ellipse and is no longer exactly periodic. This deviation
+from a Keplerian motion is, however, very small compared
+with the perturbations due to the presence of external forces, such
+as occur in experiments on the Zeeman and Stark effects. In atoms
+of higher atomic number it is also negligible compared with the
+disturbing effect of the inner electrons on the motion of the outer
+electron. The neglect of the change in mass will therefore have no
+important influence upon the explanation of the Zeeman and Stark
+effects, or upon the explanation of the difference between the
+hydrogen spectrum and the spectra of other elements.
+\PageSep{38}
+
+We shall therefore as before consider the motion of the unperturbed
+hydrogen atom as simply periodic and inquire in the
+first place about the stationary states corresponding to this motion.
+The energy in these states will then be determined by expression~\Eq{(7)}
+which was derived from the spectrum of hydrogen. The energy of
+the system being given, the major axis of the elliptical orbit of the
+electron and its frequency of revolution are also determined. Substituting
+in formulae \Eq{(7)} and~\Eq{(8)} the expression for~$K$ given in~\Eq{(12)},
+we obtain for the energy, major axis and frequency of revolution
+in the $n$th~state of the unperturbed atom the expressions
+\[
+\BreakMath{%
+E_{n} = -W_{n} = -\frac{1}{n^{2}}\, \frac{2\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{2}},\quad
+2a_{n} = n^{2}\, \frac{h^{2}}{2\pi^{2} e^{2} m},\quad
+\omega_{n} = \frac{1}{n^{3}}\, \frac{4\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{3}}.
+}{%
+\begin{gathered}
+E_{n} = -W_{n} = -\frac{1}{n^{2}}\, \frac{2\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{2}}, \\
+2a_{n} = n^{2}\, \frac{h^{2}}{2\pi^{2} e^{2} m},\qquad
+\omega_{n} = \frac{1}{n^{3}}\, \frac{4\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{3}}.
+\end{gathered}
+}
+\Tag{(17)}
+\]
+
+We must further assume that in the stationary states of the
+unperturbed system the form of the orbit is so far undetermined
+that the \Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity} can vary continuously. This is not only immediately
+indicated by the principle of correspondence,---since the
+frequency of revolution is determined only by the energy and not
+by the \Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity},---but also by the fact that the presence of any
+small external forces will in general, in the course of time, produce
+a finite change in the position as well as in the \Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity} of the
+periodic orbit, while in the major axis it can produce only small
+changes proportional to the intensity of the perturbing forces.
+
+In order to fix the stationary states of systems in the presence
+of a given conservative external field of force, we shall have to
+investigate, on the basis of the principle of correspondence, how
+these forces affect the decomposition of the motion into harmonic
+oscillations. Owing to the external forces the form and position of
+the orbit will vary continuously. In the general case these changes
+will be so complicated that it will not be possible to decompose the
+perturbed motion into discrete harmonic oscillations. In such a
+case we must expect that the perturbed system will not possess
+any sharply separated stationary states. Although each emission
+of radiation must be assumed to be monochromatic and to proceed
+according to the general frequency condition we shall therefore
+expect the final effect to be a broadening of the sharp spectral lines
+of the unperturbed system. In certain cases, however, the perturbations
+\PageSep{39}
+will be of such a regular character that the perturbed system
+can be decomposed into harmonic oscillations, although the ensemble
+of these oscillations will naturally be of a more complicated kind
+than in the unperturbed system. This happens, for example, when
+the variations of the orbit with respect to time are periodic. In
+this case harmonic oscillations will appear in the motion of the
+system the frequencies of which are equal to whole multiples of the
+period of the orbital perturbations, and in the spectrum to be
+expected on the basis of the ordinary theory of radiation we would
+expect components corresponding to these frequencies. According
+to the principle of correspondence we are therefore immediately
+led to the conclusion, that to each stationary state in the unperturbed
+system there corresponds a number of stationary states in
+the perturbed system in such a manner, that for a transition
+between two of these states a radiation is emitted, whose frequency
+stands in the same relationship to the periodic course of the
+variations in the orbit, as the spectrum of a simple periodic system
+does to its motion in the stationary states.
+
+\Section{The Stark effect.} An instructive example of the appearance of
+periodic perturbations is obtained when hydrogen is subjected to
+the effect of a homogeneous electric field. The \Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity} and
+the position of the orbit vary continuously under the influence of
+the field. During these changes, however, it is found that the
+centre of the orbit remains in a plane perpendicular to the direction
+of the electric force and that its motion in this plane is
+simply periodic. When the centre has returned to its starting
+point, the orbit will resume its original \Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity} and position,
+and from this moment the entire cycle of orbits will be repeated.
+In this case the determination of the energy of the stationary
+states of the disturbed system is extremely simple, since it is found
+that the period of the disturbance does not depend upon the
+original configuration of the orbits nor therefore upon the position
+of the plane in which the centre of the orbit moves, but only upon
+the major axis and the frequency of revolution. From a simple
+calculation it is found that the period a is given by the following
+formula
+\[
+\sigma = \frac{3eF}{8\pi^{2} ma\omega},
+\Tag{(18)}
+\]
+\PageSep{40}
+where $F$~is the intensity of the external electric field. From
+analogy with the fixation of the distinctive energy values of a
+Planck oscillator we must therefore expect that the energy difference
+between two different states, corresponding to the same stationary
+state of the unperturbed system, will simply be equal to a whole
+multiple of the product of $h$~by the period~$\sigma$ of the perturbations.
+We are therefore immediately led to the following expression for
+the energy of the stationary states of the perturbed system,
+\[
+E = E_{n} + kh\sigma,
+\Tag{(19)}
+\]
+where $E_{n}$~depends only upon the number~$n$ characterizing the
+stationary state of the unperturbed system, while $k$~is a new whole
+number which in this case may be either positive or negative. As
+we shall see below, consideration of the relation between the energy
+and the motion of the system shows that $k$~must be numerically
+less than~$n$, if, as before, we place the quantity~$E_{n}$ equal to the
+energy~$-W_{n}$ of the $n$th~stationary state of the undisturbed atom.
+Substituting the values of $W_{n}$,~$\omega_{n}$ and~$a_{n}$ given by~\Eq{(17)} in formula~\Eq{(19)}
+we get
+\[
+E = -\frac{1}{n^{2}}\, \frac{2\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{2}} + nk\, \frac{3h^{2} F}{8\pi^{2} em}.
+\Tag{(20)}
+\]
+To find the effect of an electric field upon the lines of the hydrogen
+spectrum, we use the frequency condition~\Eq{(4)} and obtain for the
+frequency~$\nu$ of the radiation emitted by a transition between two
+stationary states defined by the numbers $n'$,~$k'$ and $n''$,~$k''$
+\[
+\nu = \frac{2\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{3}} \left(\frac{1}{(n'')^{2}} - \frac{1}{(n'')^{2}}\right)
+ + \frac{3h · F}{8\pi^{2} em} (n'k' - n''k'').
+\Tag{(21)}
+\]
+
+It is well known that this formula provides a complete explanation
+of the Stark effect of the hydrogen lines. It corresponds
+exactly with the one obtained by a different method by Epstein
+and Schwarzschild. They used the fact that the hydrogen atom in
+a homogeneous electric field is a conditionally periodic system
+permitting a separation of variables by the use of parabolic coordinates.
+The stationary states were fixed by applying quantum
+conditions to each of these variables.
+
+We shall now consider more closely the correspondence between
+the changes in the spectrum of hydrogen due to the presence of
+\PageSep{41}
+an electric field and the decomposition of the perturbed motion
+of the atom into its harmonic components. Instead of the simple
+decomposition into harmonic components corresponding to a simple
+Kepler motion, the displacement~$\xi$ of the electron in a given
+direction in space can be expressed in the present case by the
+formula
+\[
+\xi = \sum C_{\tau,\kappa} \cos 2\pi \bigl\{t(\tau\omega + \kappa\sigma) + c_{\tau,\kappa}\bigr\},
+\Tag{(22)}
+\]
+where $\omega$~is the average frequency of revolution in the perturbed
+orbit and $\sigma$~is the period of the orbital perturbations, while $C_{\tau,\kappa}$~and
+$c_{\tau,\kappa}$ are constants. The summation is to be extended over all integral
+values for $\tau$~and~$\kappa$.
+
+If we now consider a transition between two stationary states
+characterized by certain numbers $n'$,~$k'$ and $n''$,~$k''$, we find that in
+the region where these numbers are large compared with their
+differences $n' - n''$ and $k' - k''$, the frequency of the spectral line
+which is emitted will be given approximately by the formula
+\[
+\nu \sim (n' - n'')\omega + (k' - k'')\sigma.
+\Tag{(23)}
+\]
+We see, therefore, that we have obtained a relation between the
+spectrum and the motion of precisely the same character as in the
+simple case of the unperturbed hydrogen atom. We have here a
+similar correspondence between the harmonic component in the
+motion, corresponding to definite values for $\tau$~and $\kappa$ in formula~\Eq{(22)},
+and the transition between two stationary states for which $n' - n'' = \tau$
+and $k' - k'' = \kappa$.
+
+A number of interesting results can be obtained from this
+correspondence by considering the motion in more detail. Each
+harmonic component in expression~\Eq{(22)} for which $\tau + \kappa$ is an even
+number corresponds to a linear oscillation parallel to the direction
+of the electric field, while each component for which $\tau + \kappa$ is odd
+corresponds to an elliptical oscillation perpendicular to this direction.
+The correspondence principle suggests at once that these
+facts are connected with the \emph{characteristic polarization} observed in
+the Stark effect. We would anticipate that a transition for which
+$(n' - n'') + (k' - k'')$ is even would give rise to a component with an
+electric vector parallel to the field, while a transition for which
+$(n' - n'') + (k' - k'')$ is odd would correspond to a component with an
+\PageSep{42}
+electric vector perpendicular to the field. These results have been
+fully confirmed by experiment and correspond to the empirical rule
+of polarization, which Epstein proposed in his first paper on the
+Stark effect.
+
+The applications of the correspondence principle that have so
+far been described have been purely qualitative in character. It is
+possible however to obtain a quantitative estimate of the relative
+intensity of the various components of the Stark effect of hydrogen,
+by correlating the numerical values of the coefficients~$C_{\tau,\kappa}$ in formula~\Eq{(22)}
+with the probability of the corresponding transitions between
+the stationary states. This problem has been treated in detail by
+Kramers in a recently published dissertation. In this he gives a
+thorough discussion of the application of the correspondence principle
+to the question of the intensity of spectral lines.
+
+\Section{The Zeeman effect.} The problem of the effect of a homogeneous
+magnetic field upon the hydrogen lines may be treated in an
+entirely analogous manner. The effect on the motion of the hydrogen
+atom consists simply of the superposition of a uniform rotation
+upon the motion of the electron in the unperturbed atom.
+The axis of rotation is parallel with the direction of the magnetic
+force, while the frequency of revolution is given by the formula
+\[
+\sigma = \frac{eH}{4\pi mc},
+\Tag{(24)}
+\]
+where $H$~is the intensity of the field and $c$~the velocity of light.
+
+Again we have a case where the perturbations are simply
+periodic and where the period of the perturbations is independent
+of the form and position of the orbit, and in the present case, even
+of the major axis. Similar considerations apply therefore as in the
+case of the Stark effect, and we must expect that the energy in the
+stationary states will again be given by formula~\Eq{(19)}, if we substitute
+for~$\sigma$ the value given in expression~\Eq{(24)}. This result is
+also in complete agreement with that obtained by Sommerfeld and
+Debye. The method they used involved the solution of the equations
+of motion by the method of the separation of the variables. The
+appropriate coordinates are polar ones about an axis parallel to
+the field.
+
+If we try, however, to calculate directly the effect of the field by
+\PageSep{43}
+means of the frequency condition~\Eq{(4)}, we immediately meet with
+an apparent disagreement which for some time was regarded as a
+grave difficulty for the theory. As both Sommerfeld and Debye
+have pointed out, lines are not observed corresponding to every
+transition between the stationary states included in the formula.
+We overcome this difficulty, however, as soon as we apply the
+principle of correspondence. If we consider the harmonic components
+of the motion we obtain a simple explanation both of the
+non-occurrence of certain transitions and of the observed polarization.
+In the magnetic field each elliptic harmonic component having
+the frequency~$\tau\omega$ splits up into three harmonic components owing
+to the uniform rotation of the orbit. Of these one is rectilinear
+with frequency~$\tau\omega$ oscillating parallel to the magnetic field, and
+two are circular with frequencies $\tau\omega + \sigma$ and $\tau\omega - \sigma$ oscillating in
+opposite directions in a plane perpendicular to the direction of the
+field. Consequently the motion represented by formula~\Eq{(22)} contains
+no components for which $\kappa$~is numerically greater than~$1$, in contrast
+to the Stark effect, where components corresponding to all values
+of~$\kappa$ are present. Now formula~\Eq{(23)} again applies for large values
+of $n$~and~$k$, and shows the asymptotic agreement between the
+frequency of the radiation and the frequency of a harmonic component
+in the motion. We arrive, therefore, at the conclusion that
+transitions for which $k$~changes by more than unity \Chg{can not}{cannot} occur.
+The argument is similar to that by which transitions between two
+distinctive states of a Planck oscillator for which the values of~$n$
+in~\Eq{(1)} differ by more than unity are excluded. We must further
+conclude that the various possible transitions consist of two types.
+For the one type corresponding to the rectilinear component, $k$~remains
+unchanged, and in the emitted radiation which possesses
+the same frequency~$\nu_{0}$ as the original hydrogen line, the electric
+vector will oscillate parallel with the field. For the second type,
+corresponding to the circular components, $k$~will increase or decrease
+by unity, and the radiation viewed in the direction of the field will
+be circularly polarized and have frequencies $\nu_{0} + \sigma$ and $\nu_{0} - \sigma$ respectively.
+These results agree with those of the familiar Lorentz
+theory. The similarity in the two theories is remarkable, when we
+recall the fundamental difference between the ideas of the quantum
+theory and the ordinary theories of radiation.
+\PageSep{44}
+
+\Section{Central perturbations.} An illustration based on similar considerations
+which will throw light upon the spectra of other elements
+consists in finding the effect of a small perturbing field of
+force radially symmetrical with respect to the nucleus. In this case
+neither the form of the orbit nor the position of its plane will
+change with time, and the perturbing effect of the field will simply
+consist of a uniform rotation of the major axis of the orbit. The
+perturbations are periodic, so that we may assume that to each
+energy value of a stationary state of the unperturbed system there
+belongs a series of discrete energy values of the perturbed system,
+characterized by different values of a whole number~$k$. The frequency~$\sigma$
+of the perturbations is equal to the frequency of rotation
+of the major axis. For a given law of force for the perturbing
+field we find that $\sigma$~depends both on the major axis and on the
+\Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity}. The change in the energy of the stationary states,
+therefore, will not be given by an expression as simple as the
+second term in formula~\Eq{(19)}, but will be a function of~$k$, which is
+different for different fields. It is possible, however, to characterize
+by one and the same condition the motion in the stationary states
+of a hydrogen atom which is perturbed by any central field. In
+order to show this we must consider more closely the fixation of
+the motion of a perturbed hydrogen atom.
+
+In the stationary states of the unperturbed hydrogen atom
+only the major axis of the orbit is to be regarded as fixed,
+while the \Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity} may assume any value. Since the change
+in the energy of the atom due to the external field of force depends
+upon the form and position of its orbit, the fixation of the
+energy of the atom in the presence of such a field naturally
+involves a closer determination of the orbit of the perturbed
+system.
+
+Consider, for the sake of illustration, the change in the hydrogen
+spectrum due to the presence of homogeneous electric and magnetic
+fields which was described by equation~\Eq{(19)}. It is found that
+this energy condition can be given a simple geometrical interpretation.
+In the case of an electric field the distance from the
+nucleus to the plane in which the centre of the orbit moves determines
+the change in the energy of the system due to the presence
+of the field. In the stationary states this distance is simply equal
+\PageSep{45}
+to $\dfrac{k}{n}$~times half the major axis of the orbit. In the case of a magnetic
+field it is found that the quantity which determines the change
+of energy of the system is the area of the projection of the orbit
+upon a plane perpendicular to the magnetic force. In the various
+stationary states this area is equal to $\dfrac{k}{n}$~times the area of a circle
+whose radius is equal to half the major axis of the orbit. In the
+case of a perturbing central force the correspondence between
+the spectrum and the motion which is required by the quantum
+theory leads now to the simple condition that in the stationary
+states of the perturbed system the minor axis of the rotating orbit
+is simply equal to $\dfrac{k}{n}$~times the major axis. This condition was first
+derived by Sommerfeld from his general theory for the determination
+of the stationary states of a central motion. It is easily shown
+that this fixation of the value of the minor axis is equivalent to
+the statement that the parameter~$2p$ of the elliptical orbit is given
+by an expression of exactly the same form as that which gives the
+major axis~$2a$ in the unperturbed atom. The only difference from
+the expression for~$2a_{n}$ in~\Eq{(17)} is that $n$~is replaced by~$k$, so that
+the value of the parameter in the stationary states of the perturbed
+atom is given by
+\[
+2p_{k} = k^{2}\, \frac{h^{2}}{2\pi^{2} e^{2} m}.
+\Tag{(25)}
+\]
+The frequency of the radiation emitted by a transition between
+two stationary states determined in this way for which $n'$~and~$n''$ are
+large in proportion to their difference is given by an expression
+which is the same as that in equation~\Eq{(23)}, if in this case $\omega$~is the
+frequency of revolution of the electron in the slowly rotating orbit
+and $\sigma$~represents the frequency of rotation of the major axis.
+
+Before proceeding further, it might be of interest to note that
+this fixation of the stationary states of the hydrogen atom perturbed
+by external electric and magnetic forces does not coincide in certain
+respects with the theories of Sommerfeld, Epstein and Debye.
+According to the theory of conditionally periodic systems the stationary
+states for a system of three degrees of freedom will in general
+be determined by three conditions, and therefore in these theories
+\PageSep{46}
+each state is characterized by three whole numbers. This would
+mean that the stationary states of the perturbed hydrogen atom
+corresponding to a certain stationary state of the unperturbed
+hydrogen atom, fixed by one condition, should be subject to two
+further conditions and should therefore be characterized by two
+new whole numbers in addition to the number~$n$. But the perturbations
+of the Keplerian motion are simply periodic and the
+energy of the perturbed atom will therefore be fixed completely
+by one additional condition. The introduction of a second condition
+will add nothing further to the explanation of the phenomenon,
+since with the appearance of new perturbing forces, even if
+these are too small noticeably to affect the observed Zeeman and
+Stark effects, the forms of motion characterized by such a condition
+may be entirely changed. This is completely analogous to the
+fact that the hydrogen spectrum as it is usually observed is not
+noticeably affected by small forces, even when they are large enough
+to produce a great change in the form and position of the orbit of
+the electron.
+
+\Section{Relativity effect on hydrogen lines.} Before leaving the hydrogen
+spectrum I shall consider briefly the effect of the variation of
+the mass of the electron with its velocity. In the preceding sections
+I have described how external fields of force split up the hydrogen
+lines into several components, but it should be noticed that these
+results are only accurate when the perturbations are large in comparison
+with the small deviations from a pure Keplerian motion
+due to the variation of the mass of the electron with its velocity.
+When the variation of the mass is taken into account the motion
+of the unperturbed atom will not be exactly periodic. Instead we
+obtain a motion of precisely the same kind as that occurring in the
+hydrogen atom perturbed by a small central field. According to
+the correspondence principle an intimate connection is to be expected
+between the frequency of revolution of the major axis of the
+orbit and the difference of the frequencies of the fine structure
+components, and the stationary states will be those orbits whose
+parameters are given by expression~\Eq{(25)}. If we now consider the
+effect of external forces upon the fine structure components of the
+hydrogen lines it is necessary to keep in mind that this fixation of
+\PageSep{47}
+the stationary states only applies to the unperturbed hydrogen
+atom, and that, as mentioned, the orbits in these states are in
+general already strongly influenced by the presence of external
+forces, which are small compared with those with which we are
+concerned in experiments on the Stark and Zeeman effects. In
+general the presence of such forces will lead to a great complexity
+of perturbations, and the atom will no longer possess a group of
+sharply defined stationary states. The fine structure components
+of a given hydrogen line will therefore become diffuse and merged
+together. There are, however, several important cases where this
+does not happen on account of the simple character of the perturbations.
+The simplest example is a hydrogen atom perturbed
+by a central force acting from the nucleus. In this case it is evident
+that the motion of the system will retain its centrally symmetrical
+character, and that the perturbed motion will differ from the unperturbed
+motion only in that the frequency of rotation of the major
+axis will be different for different values of this axis and of the
+parameter. This point is of importance in the theory of the
+spectra of elements of higher atomic number, since, as we shall see,
+the effect of the forces originating from the inner electrons may
+to a first approximation be compared with that of a perturbing
+central field. We \Chg{can not}{cannot} therefore expect these spectra to exhibit
+a separate effect due to the variation of the mass of the electron
+of the same kind as that found in the case of the hydrogen lines.
+This variation will not give rise to a splitting up into separate
+components but only to small displacements in the position of the
+various lines.
+
+We obtain still another simple example in which the hydrogen
+atom possesses sharp stationary states, although the change of mass
+of the electron is considered, if we take an atom subject to a homogeneous
+magnetic field. The effect of such a field will consist in
+the superposition of a rotation of the entire system about an axis
+through the nucleus and parallel with the magnetic force. It follows
+immediately from this result according to the principle of correspondence
+that each fine structure component must be expected
+to split up into a normal Zeeman effect (Lorentz triplet). The
+problem may also be solved by means of the theory of conditionally
+periodic systems, since the equations of motion in the presence
+\PageSep{48}
+of a magnetic field, even when the change in the mass is considered,
+will allow of a separation of the variables using polar
+coordinates in space. This has been pointed out by Sommerfeld
+and Debye.
+
+A more complicated case arises when the atom is exposed to a
+homogeneous electric field which is not so strong that the effect
+due to the change in the mass may be neglected. In this case there
+is no system of coordinates by which the equations of motion can
+be solved by separation of the variables, and the problem, therefore,
+\Chg{can not}{cannot} be treated by the theory of the stationary states of conditionally
+periodic systems. A closer investigation of the perturbations,
+however, shows them to be of such a character that the motion
+of the electrons may be decomposed into a number of separate harmonic
+components. These fall into two groups for which the direction
+of oscillation is either parallel with or perpendicular to the
+field. According to the principle of correspondence, therefore, we
+must expect that also in this case in the presence of the field each
+hydrogen line will consist of a number of sharp, polarized components.
+In fact by means of the principles I have described, it is
+possible to give a unique fixation of the stationary states. The
+problem of the effect of a homogeneous electric field upon the fine
+structure components of the hydrogen lines has been treated in
+detail from this point of view by Kramers in a paper which will
+soon be published. In this paper it will be shown how it appears
+possible to predict in detail the manner in which the fine structure
+of the hydrogen lines gradually changes into the ordinary Stark
+effect as the electric intensity increases.
+
+\Section{Theory of series spectra.} Let us now turn our attention once
+more to the problem of the series spectra of elements of higher
+atomic number. The general appearance of the Rydberg constant
+in these spectra is to be explained by assuming that the atom is
+neutral and that one electron revolves in an orbit the dimensions
+of which are large in comparison with the distance of the inner electrons
+from the nucleus. In a certain sense, therefore, the motion of
+the outer electron may be compared with the motion of the electron
+of the hydrogen atom perturbed by external forces, and the appearance
+of the various series in the spectra of the other elements is
+\PageSep{49}
+from this point of view to be regarded as analogous to the splitting
+up of the hydrogen lines into components on account of such forces.
+
+In his theory of the structure of series spectra of the type exhibited
+by the alkali metals, Sommerfeld has made the assumption
+that the orbit of the outer electron to a first approximation possesses
+the same character as that produced by a simple perturbing
+central field whose intensity diminishes rapidly with increasing
+distance from the nucleus. He fixed the motion of the external
+electron by means of his general theory for the fixation of the
+stationary states of a central motion. The application of this
+method depends on the possibility of separating the variables in
+the equations of motion. In this manner Sommerfeld was able to
+calculate a number of energy values which can be arranged in rows
+just like the empirical spectral terms shown in the diagram of the
+sodium spectrum (\PageRef[p.]{30}). The states grouped together by Sommerfeld
+in the separate rows are exactly those which were characterized
+by one and the same value of~$k$ in our investigation of the
+hydrogen atom perturbed by a central force. The states in the
+first row of the figure (row~$S$) correspond to the value $k = 1$, those
+of the second row~($P$) correspond to $k = 2$, etc. The states corresponding
+to one and the same value of~$n$ are connected by dotted
+lines which are continued so that their vertical asymptotes correspond
+to the energy value of the stationary states of the hydrogen
+atom. The fact that for a constant~$n$ and increasing values of~$k$
+the energy values approach the corresponding values for the unperturbed
+hydrogen atom is immediately evident from the theory
+since the outer electron, for large values of the parameter of its
+orbit, remains at a great distance from the inner system during the
+whole revolution. The orbit will become almost elliptical and the
+period of rotation of the major axis will be very large. It can be
+seen, therefore, that the effect of the inner system on the energy
+necessary to remove this electron from the atom must become less
+for increasing values of~$k$.
+
+These beautiful results suggest the possibility of finding laws of
+force for the perturbing central field which would account for the
+spectra observed. Although Sommerfeld in this way has in fact
+succeeded in deriving formulae for the spectral terms which vary
+with~$n$ for a constant~$k$ in agreement with Rydberg's formulae, it
+\PageSep{50}
+has not been possible to explain the simultaneous variation with
+both $k$~and~$n$ in any actual case. This is not surprising, since it is
+to be anticipated that the effect of the inner electrons on the spectrum
+could not be accounted for in such a simple manner. Further
+consideration shows that it is necessary to consider not only the
+forces which originate from the inner electrons but also to consider
+the effect of the presence of the outer electron upon the motion of
+the inner electrons.
+
+Before considering the series spectra of elements of low atomic
+number I shall point out how the occurrence or non-occurrence of
+certain transitions can be shown by the correspondence principle
+to furnish convincing evidence in favour of Sommerfeld's assumption
+about the orbit of the outer electron. For this purpose we
+must describe the motion of the outer electron in terms of its harmonic
+components. This is easily performed if we assume that the
+presence of the inner electrons simply produces a uniform rotation
+of the orbit of the outer electron in its plane. On account of this
+rotation, the frequency of which we will denote by~$\sigma$, two circular
+rotations with the periods $\tau\omega + \sigma$ and $\tau\omega - \sigma$ will appear in the
+motion of the perturbed electron, instead of each of the harmonic
+elliptical components with a period $\tau\omega$ in the unperturbed motion.
+The decomposition of the perturbed motion into harmonic components
+consequently will again be represented by a formula of the
+type~\Eq{(22)}, in which only such terms appear for which $\kappa$~is equal
+to $+1$ or~$-1$. Since the frequency of the emitted radiation in the
+regions where $n$~and $k$ are large is again given by the asymptotic
+formula~\Eq{(23)}, we at once deduce from the correspondence principle
+that the only transitions which can take place are those for which
+the values of~$k$ differ by unity. A glance at the figure for the sodium
+spectrum shows that this agrees exactly with the experimental
+results. This fact is all the more remarkable, since in Sommerfeld's
+theory the arrangement of the energy values of the stationary
+states in rows has no special relation to the possibility of transition
+between these states.
+
+\Section{Correspondence principle and conservation of angular momentum.}
+Besides these results the correspondence principle suggests
+that the radiation emitted by the perturbed atom must
+\PageSep{51}
+exhibit circular polarization. On account of the indeterminateness
+of the plane of the orbit, however, this polarization \Chg{can not}{cannot} be
+directly observed. The assumption of such a polarization is a matter
+of particular interest for the theory of radiation emission. On
+account of the general correspondence between the spectrum of
+an atom and the decomposition of its motion into harmonic
+components, we are led to compare the radiation emitted during
+the transition between two stationary states with the radiation
+which would be emitted by a harmonically oscillating
+electron on the basis of the classical electrodynamics. In particular
+the radiation emitted according to the classical theory
+by an electron revolving in a circular orbit possesses an angular
+momentum and the energy~$\Delta E$ and the angular momentum~$\Delta P$ of
+the radiation emitted during a certain time are connected by the
+relation
+\[
+\Delta E = 2\pi\omega · \Delta P.
+\Tag{(26)}
+\]
+
+Here $\omega$~represents the frequency of revolution of the electron,
+and according to the classical theory this is equal to the frequency~$\nu$
+of the radiation. If we now assume that the total energy emitted
+is equal to~$h\nu$ we obtain for the total angular momentum of the
+radiation
+\[
+\Delta P = \frac{h}{2\pi}.
+\Tag{(27)}
+\]
+
+It is extremely interesting to note that this expression is equal
+to the change in the angular momentum which the atom suffers in
+a transition where $k$~varies by unity. For in Sommerfeld's theory
+the general condition for the fixation of the stationary states of a
+central system, which in the special case of an approximately
+Keplerian motion is equivalent to the relation~\Eq{(25)}, asserts that
+the angular momentum of the system must be equal to a whole
+multiple of~$\dfrac{h}{2\pi}$, a condition which may be written in our notation
+\[
+P = k\, \frac{h}{2\pi}.
+\Tag{(28)}
+\]
+We see, therefore, that this condition has obtained direct support
+from a simple consideration of the conservation of angular momentum
+during the emission of the radiation. I wish to emphasize
+that this equation is to be regarded as a rational generalization of
+\PageSep{52}
+Planck's original statement about the distinctive states of a harmonic
+oscillator. It may be of interest to recall that the possible
+significance of the angular momentum in applications of the
+quantum theory to atomic processes was first pointed out by
+Nicholson on the basis of the fact that for a circular motion the
+angular momentum is simply proportional to the ratio of the
+kinetic energy to the frequency of revolution.
+
+In a previous paper which I presented to the Copenhagen
+Academy I pointed out that these results confirm the conclusions
+obtained by the application of the correspondence principle to
+atomic systems possessing radial or axial symmetry. Rubinowicz
+has independently indicated the conclusions which may be obtained
+directly from a consideration of conservation of angular momentum
+during the radiation process. In this way he has obtained several
+of our results concerning the various types of possible transitions
+and the polarization of the emitted radiation. Even for systems
+possessing radial or axial symmetry, however, the conclusions which
+we can draw by means of the correspondence principle are of a
+more detailed character than can be obtained solely from a consideration
+of the conservation of angular momentum. For example,
+in the case of the hydrogen atom perturbed by a central force we
+can only conclude that $k$~\Chg{can not}{cannot} change by more than unity, while
+the correspondence principle requires that $k$~shall vary by unity
+for every possible transition and that its value cannot remain unchanged.
+Further, this principle enables us not only to exclude
+certain transitions as being impossible---and can from this point of
+view be considered as a ``selection principle''---but it also enables
+us to draw conclusions about the relative probabilities of the various
+possible types of transitions from the values of the amplitudes of
+the harmonic components. In the present case, for example, the
+fact that the amplitudes of those circular components which rotate
+in the same sense as the electron are in general greater than the
+amplitudes of those which rotate in the opposite sense leads us to
+expect that lines corresponding to transitions for which $k$~decreases
+by unity will in general possess greater intensity than lines during
+the emission of which $k$~increases by unity. Simple considerations
+like this, however, apply only to spectral lines corresponding to
+transitions from one and the same stationary state. In other
+\PageSep{53}
+cases when we wish to estimate the relative intensities of two
+spectral lines it is clearly necessary to take into consideration the
+relative number of atoms which are present in each of the two
+stationary states from which the transitions start. While the intensity
+naturally \Chg{can not}{cannot} depend upon the number of atoms in the
+final state, it is to be noticed, however, that in estimating the
+probability of a transition between two stationary states it is necessary
+to consider the character of the motion in the final as well as
+in the initial state, since the values of the amplitudes of the components
+of oscillation of both states are to be regarded as decisive
+for the probability.
+
+To show how this method can be applied I shall return for a
+moment to the problem which I mentioned in connection with
+Strutt's experiment on the resonance radiation of sodium vapour.
+This involved the discussion of the relative probability of the various
+possible transitions which can start from that state corresponding
+to the second term in the second row of the figure on \PageRef[p.]{30}. These
+were transitions to the first and second states in the first row and
+to the first state in the third row, and the results of experiment
+indicate, as we saw, that the probability is greatest for the second
+transitions. These transitions correspond to those harmonic components
+having frequencies $2\omega + \sigma$, $\omega + \sigma$ and~$\sigma$, and it is seen
+that only for the second transition do the amplitudes of the corresponding
+harmonic component differ from zero in the initial as
+well as in the final state. [In the next essay the reader will find
+that the values of quantum number~$n$ assigned in \Fig{1} to the
+various stationary states must be altered. While this correction
+in no way influences the other conclusions in this essay it involves
+that the reasoning in this passage \Chg{can not}{cannot} be maintained.]
+
+I have shown how the correspondence between the spectrum of
+an element and the motion of the atom enables us to understand
+the limitations in the direct application of the combination principle
+in the prediction of spectral lines. The same ideas give an immediate
+explanation of the interesting discovery made in recent years
+by Stark and his collaborators, that certain \emph{new series of combination
+lines} appear with considerable intensity when the radiating
+atoms are subject to a strong external electric field. This phenomenon
+is entirely analogous to the appearance of the so-called
+\PageSep{54}
+combination tones in acoustics. It is due to the fact that the
+perturbation of the motion will not only consist in an effect upon
+the components originally present, but in addition will give rise to
+new components. The frequencies of these new components may be
+$\tau\omega + \kappa\sigma$, where $\kappa$~is different from~$±1$. According to the correspondence
+principle we must therefore expect that the electric field will
+not only influence the lines appearing under ordinary circumstances,
+but that it will also render possible new types of transitions which
+give rise to the ``new'' combination lines observed. From an estimate
+of the amplitudes of the particular components in the initial
+and final states it has even been found possible to account for the
+varying facility with which the new lines are brought up by the
+external field.
+
+The general problem of the effect of an electric field on the spectra
+of elements of higher atomic number differs essentially from the
+simple Stark effect of the hydrogen lines, since we are here concerned
+not with the perturbation of a purely periodic system, but
+with the effect of the field on a periodic motion already subject to
+a perturbation. The problem to a certain extent resembles the
+effect of a weak electric force on the fine structure components of
+the hydrogen atom. In much the same way the effect of an electric
+field upon the series spectra of the elements may be treated directly
+by investigating the perturbations of the external electron. A
+continuation of my paper in the Transactions of the Copenhagen
+Academy will soon appear in which I shall show how this method
+enables us to understand the interesting observations Stark and
+others have made in this field.
+
+\Section{The spectra of helium and lithium.} We see that it has been
+possible to obtain a certain general insight into the origin of the
+series spectra of a type like that of sodium. The difficulties encountered
+in an attempt to give a detailed explanation of the
+spectrum of a particular element, however, become very serious,
+even when we consider the spectrum of helium whose neutral atom
+contains only two electrons. The spectrum of this element has a
+simple structure in that it consists of single lines or at any rate of
+double lines whose components are very close together. We find,
+however, that the lines fall into two groups each of which can be
+\PageSep{55}
+described by a formula of the type~\Eq{(14)}. These are usually called
+the (ortho) helium and parhelium spectra. While the latter consists
+of simple lines, the former possesses narrow doublets. The
+discovery that helium, as opposed to the alkali metals, possesses
+two complete spectra of the Rydberg type which do not exhibit any
+mutual combinations was so surprising that at times there has been
+a tendency to believe that helium consisted of two elements. This
+way out of the difficulty is no longer open, since there is no room
+for another element in this region of the periodic system, or more
+correctly expressed, for an element possessing a new spectrum. The
+existence of the two spectra can, however, be traced back to the fact
+that in the stationary states corresponding to the series spectra we
+have to do with a system possessing only one inner electron and in
+consequence the motion of the inner system, in the absence of the
+outer electron, will be simply periodic and therefore easily perturbed
+by external forces.
+
+In order to illustrate this point we shall have to consider more
+carefully the stationary states connected with the origin of a series
+spectrum. We must assume that in these states one electron revolves
+in an orbit outside the nucleus and the other electrons. We
+might now suppose that in general a number of different groups of
+such states might exist, each group corresponding to a different
+stationary state of the inner system considered by itself. Further
+consideration shows, however, that under the usual conditions of
+excitation those groups have by far the greatest probability for which
+the motion of the inner electrons corresponds to the ``normal'' state
+of the inner system, \ie\ to that stationary state having the least
+energy. Further the energy required to transfer the inner system
+from its normal state to another stationary state is in general very
+large compared with the energy which is necessary to transfer an
+electron from the normal state of the neutral atom to a stationary
+orbit of greater dimensions. Lastly the inner system is in general
+capable of a permanent existence only in its normal state. Now,
+the configuration of an atomic system in its stationary states and
+also in the normal state will, in general, be completely determined.
+We may therefore expect that the inner system under the influence
+of the forces arising from the presence of the outer electron can in
+the course of time suffer only small changes. For this reason we
+\PageSep{56}
+must assume that the influence of the inner system upon the motion
+of the external electron will, in general, be of the same character
+as the perturbations produced by a constant external field upon
+the motion of the electron in the hydrogen atom. We must therefore
+expect a spectrum consisting of an ensemble of spectral terms,
+which in general form a connected group, even though in the
+absence of external perturbing forces not every combination actually
+occurs. The case of the helium spectrum, however, is quite different
+since here the inner system contains only one electron the motion
+of which in the absence of the external electron is simple periodic
+provided the small changes due to the variation in the mass of the
+electron with its velocity are neglected. For this reason the form of
+the orbit in the stationary states of the inner system considered by
+itself will not be determined. In other words, the stability of the
+orbit is so slight, even if the variation in the mass is taken into
+account, that small external forces are in a position to change the
+\Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity} in the course of time to a finite extent. In this case,
+therefore, it is possible to have several groups of stationary states,
+for which the energy of the inner system is approximately the same
+while the form of the orbit of the inner electron and its position
+relative to the motion of the other electrons are so essentially
+different, that no transitions between the states of different groups
+can occur even in the presence of external forces. It can be seen
+that these conclusions summarize the experimental observations
+on the helium spectra.
+
+These\Pagelabel{56} considerations suggest an investigation of the nature of
+the perturbations in the orbit of the inner electron of the helium
+atom, due to the presence of the external electron. A discussion
+of the helium spectrum from this point of view has recently been
+given by Landé. The results of this work are of great interest particularly
+in the demonstration of the large back effect on the outer
+electron due to the perturbations of the inner orbit which themselves
+arise from the presence of the outer electron. Nevertheless, it can
+scarcely be regarded as a satisfactory explanation of the helium
+spectrum. Apart from the serious objections which may be raised
+against his calculation of the perturbations, difficulties arise if we
+try to apply the correspondence principle to Landé's results in
+order to account for the occurrence of two distinct spectra showing
+\PageSep{57}
+no mutual combinations. To explain this fact it seems necessary
+to base the discussion on a more thorough investigation of the
+mutual perturbations of the outer and the inner orbits. As a
+result of these perturbations both electrons move in such an
+extremely complicated way that the stationary states \Chg{can not}{cannot} be
+fixed by the methods developed for conditionally periodic systems.
+Dr~Kramers and I have in the last few years been engaged in such
+an investigation, and in an address on atomic problems at the
+meeting of the Dutch Congress of Natural and Medical Sciences
+held in Leiden, April 1919, I gave a short communication of our
+results. For various reasons we have up to the present time been
+prevented from publishing, but in the very near future we hope to
+give an account of these results and of the light which they seem
+to throw upon the helium spectrum.
+
+The problem presented by the spectra of elements of higher
+atomic number is simpler, since the inner system is better defined
+in its normal state. On the other hand the difficulty of the mechanical
+problem of course increases with the number of the particles in
+the atom. We obtain an example of this in the case of lithium
+with three electrons. The differences between the spectral terms
+of the lithium spectrum and the corresponding spectral terms of
+hydrogen are very small for the variable term of the principal series
+($k = 2$) and for the diffuse series ($k = 3$), on the other hand it is very
+considerable for the variable term of the sharp series ($k = 1$). This
+is very different from what would be expected if it were possible to
+describe the effect of the inner electron by a central force varying
+in a simple manner with the distance. This must be because the
+parameter of the orbit of the outer electron in the stationary states
+corresponding to the terms of the sharp series is not much greater
+than the linear dimensions of the orbits of the inner electrons.
+According to the principle of correspondence the frequency of rotation
+of the major axis of the orbit of the outer electron is to be regarded
+as a measure of the deviation of the spectral terms from the corresponding
+hydrogen terms. In order to calculate this frequency it
+appears necessary to consider in detail the mutual effect of all three
+electrons, at all events for that part of the orbit where the outer
+electron is very close to the other two electrons. Even if we assumed
+that we were fully acquainted with the normal state of the inner
+\PageSep{58}
+system in the absence of the outer electron---which would be
+expected to be similar to the normal state of the neutral helium
+atom---the exact calculation of this mechanical problem would
+evidently form an exceedingly difficult task.
+
+\Section{Complex structure of series lines.} For the spectra of elements
+of still higher atomic number the mechanical problem which has to
+be solved in order to describe the motion in the stationary states
+becomes still more difficult. This is indicated by the extraordinarily
+complicated structure of many of the observed spectra. The fact that
+the series spectra of the alkali metals, which possess the simplest
+structure, consist of double lines whose separation increases with
+the atomic number, indicates that here we have to do with systems
+in which the motion of the outer electron possesses in general a
+somewhat more complicated character than that of a simple central
+motion. This gives rise to a more complicated ensemble of stationary
+states. It would, however, appear that in the sodium atom the major
+axis and the parameter of the stationary states corresponding to
+each pair of spectral terms are given approximately by formulae
+\Eq{(17)} and~\Eq{(25)}. This is indicated not only by the similar part played
+by the two states in the experiments on the resonance radiation of
+sodium vapour, but is also shown in a very instructive manner by
+the peculiar effect of magnetic fields on the doublets. For small
+fields each component splits up into a large number of sharp lines
+instead of into the normal Lorentz triplet. With increasing field
+strength Paschen and Back found that this \emph{anomalous Zeeman effect}
+changed into the normal Lorentz triplet of a single line by a gradual
+fusion of the components.
+
+This effect of a magnetic field upon the doublets of the alkali
+spectrum is of interest in showing the intimate relation of the components
+and confirms the reality of the simple explanation of the
+general structure of the spectra of the alkali metals. If we may
+again here rely upon the correspondence principle we have unambiguous
+evidence that the effect of a magnetic field on the motion
+of the electrons simply consists in the superposition of a uniform
+rotation with a frequency given by equation~\Eq{(24)} as in the case of
+the hydrogen atom. For if this were the case the correspondence
+principle would indicate under all conditions a normal Zeeman effect
+\PageSep{59}
+for each component of the doublets. I want to emphasize that the
+difference between the simple effect of a magnetic field, which the
+theory predicts for the fine structure of components of the hydrogen
+lines, and the observed effect on the alkali doublets is in no way to
+be considered as a contradiction. The fine structure components
+are not analogous to the individual doublet components, but each
+single fine structure component corresponds to the ensemble of
+components (doublet, triplet) which makes up one of the series lines
+in Rydberg's scheme. The occurrence in strong fields of the effect
+observed by Paschen and Back must therefore be regarded as a
+strong support for the theoretical prediction of the effect of a magnetic
+field on the fine structure components of the hydrogen lines.
+
+It does not appear necessary to assume the ``anomalous'' effect
+of small fields on the doublet components to be due to a failure of
+the ordinary electrodynamical laws for the description of the motion
+of the outer electron, but rather to be connected with an effect of
+the magnetic field on that intimate interaction between the motion
+of the inner and outer electrons which is responsible for the occurrence
+of the doublets. Such a view is probably not very different
+from the ``coupling theory'' by which Voigt was able to account
+formally for the details of the anomalous Zeeman effect. We might
+even expect it to be possible to construct a theory of these effects
+which would exhibit a formal analogy with the Voigt theory similar
+to that between the quantum theory of the normal Zeeman effect and
+the theory originally developed by Lorentz. Time unfortunately
+does not permit me to enter further into this interesting problem, so
+I must refer you to the continuation of my paper in the Transactions
+of the Copenhagen Academy, which will contain a general discussion
+of the origin of series spectra and of the effects of electric and
+magnetic fields.
+
+
+\Chapter{IV.}{Conclusion}
+
+In this lecture I have purposely not considered the question of
+the structure of atoms and molecules although this is of course most
+intimately connected with the kind of spectral theory I have developed.
+We are encouraged to use results obtained from the spectra,
+since even the simple theory of the hydrogen spectrum gives a
+value for the major axis of the orbit of the electron in the normal
+\PageSep{60}
+state ($n = 1$) of the same order of magnitude as that derived from
+the kinetic theory of gases. In my first paper on the subject I
+attempted to sketch a theory of the structure of atoms and of
+molecules of chemical compounds. This theory was based on a
+simple generalization of the results for the stationary states of the
+hydrogen atom. In several respects the theory was supported by
+experiment, especially in the general way in which the properties
+of the elements change with increasing atomic number, shown most
+clearly by Moseley's results. I should like, however, to use this
+occasion to state, that in view of the recent development of the
+quantum theory, many of the special assumptions will certainly have
+to be changed in detail. This has become clear from various sides
+by the lack of agreement of the theory with experiment. It appears
+no longer possible to justify the assumption that in the normal
+states the electrons move in orbits of special geometrical simplicity,
+like ``electronic rings.'' Considerations relating to the stability of
+atoms and molecules against external influences and concerning the
+possibility of the formation of an atom by successive addition of
+the individual electrons compel us to claim, first that the configurations
+of electrons are not only in mechanical equilibrium
+but also possess a certain stability in the sense required by
+ordinary mechanics, and secondly that the configurations employed
+must be of such a nature that transitions to these from other
+stationary states of the atom are possible. These requirements are
+not in general fulfilled by such simple configurations as electronic
+rings and they force us to look about for possibilities of more complicated
+motions. It will not be possible here to consider further
+these still open questions and I must content myself by referring
+to the discussion in my forthcoming paper. In closing, however,
+I should like to emphasize once more that in this lecture I have
+only intended to bring out certain general points of view lying at
+the basis of the spectral theory. In particular it was my intention
+to show that, in spite of the fundamental differences between these
+points of view and the ordinary conceptions of the phenomena of
+radiation, it still appears possible on the basis of the general correspondence
+between the spectrum and the motion in the atom to
+employ these conceptions in a certain sense as guides in the investigation
+of the spectra.
+\PageSep{61}
+
+
+\Essay{III}{The Structure of~the~Atom and the~Physical
+and~Chemical~Properties of~the~Elements}
+{Address delivered before a joint meeting of the Physical and Chemical
+Societies in Copenhagen, October~18, 1921.}
+
+\Chapter{I.}{Preliminary}
+
+In an address which I delivered to you about a year ago I
+described the main features of a theory of atomic structure which
+I shall attempt to develop this evening. In the meantime this
+theory has assumed more definite form, and in two recent letters
+%[** TN: Footnote mark before punctuation in the original]
+to \Title{Nature} I have given a somewhat further sketch of the development.\footnote
+ {\Title{Nature}, March~24, and October~13, 1921.}
+The results which I am about to present to you are
+of no final character; but I hope to be able to show you how this
+view renders a correlation of the various properties of the elements
+in such a way, that we avoid the difficulties which previously
+appeared to stand in the way of a simple and consistent explanation.
+Before proceeding, however, I must ask your forbearance if initially
+I deal with matters already known to you, but in order to introduce
+you to the subject it will first be necessary to give a brief
+description of the most important results which have been obtained
+in recent years in connection with the work on atomic structure.
+
+\Section{The nuclear atom.} The conception of atomic structure which
+will form the basis of all the following remarks is the so-called
+nuclear atom according to which an atom is assumed to consist of
+a nucleus surrounded by a number of electrons whose distances
+from one another and from the nucleus are very large compared
+to the dimensions of the particles themselves. The nucleus
+possesses almost the entire mass of the atom and has a positive
+charge of such a magnitude that the number of electrons in a
+neutral atom is equal to the number of the element in the periodic
+system, the so-called \emph{atomic number}. This idea of the atom, which
+is due principally to Rutherford's fundamental researches on radioactive
+substances, exhibits extremely simple features, but just this
+simplicity appears at first sight to present difficulties in explaining
+the properties of the elements. When we treat this question on
+\PageSep{62}
+the basis of the ordinary mechanical and electrodynamical theories
+it is impossible to find a starting point for an explanation of the
+marked properties exhibited by the various elements, indeed not
+even of their permanency. On the one hand the particles of the
+atom apparently could not be at rest in a state of stable equilibrium,
+and on the other hand we should have to expect that every motion
+which might be present would give rise to the emission of electromagnetic
+radiation which would not cease until all the energy of
+the system had been emitted and all the electrons had fallen into
+the nucleus. A method of escaping from these difficulties has now
+been found in the application of ideas belonging to the quantum
+theory, the basis of which was laid by Planck in his celebrated
+work on the law of temperature radiation. This represented a
+radical departure from previous conceptions since it was the first
+instance in which the assumption of a discontinuity was employed
+in the formulation of the general laws of nature.
+
+\Section{The postulates of the quantum theory.}\Pagelabel{62} The quantum theory
+in the form in which it has been applied to the problems of atomic
+structure rests upon two postulates which have a direct bearing
+on the difficulties mentioned above. According to the first postulate
+there are certain states in which the atom can exist without
+emitting radiation, although the particles are supposed to have an
+accelerated motion relative to one another. These \emph{stationary states}
+are, in addition, supposed to possess a peculiar kind of stability, so
+that it is impossible either to add energy to or remove energy from
+the atom except by a process involving a transition of the atom
+into another of these states. According to the second postulate
+each emission of radiation from the atom resulting from such a
+transition always consists of a train of purely harmonic waves.
+The frequency of these waves does not depend directly upon the
+motion of the atom, but is determined by a \emph{frequency relation},
+according to which the frequency multiplied by the universal constant
+introduced by Planck is equal to the total energy emitted
+during the process. For a transition between two stationary states
+for which the values of the energy of the atom before and after the
+emission of radiation are $E'$~and $E''$ respectively, we have therefore
+\[
+h\nu = E' - E'',
+\Tag{(1)}
+\]
+\PageSep{63}
+where $h$~is Planck's constant and $\nu$~is the frequency of the emitted
+radiation. Time does not permit me to give a systematic survey
+of the quantum theory, the recent development of which has gone
+hand in hand with its applications to atomic structure. I shall
+therefore immediately proceed to the consideration of those applications
+of the theory which are of direct importance in connection
+with our subject.
+
+\Section{Hydrogen atom.} We shall commence by considering the
+simplest atom conceivable, namely, an atom consisting of a nucleus
+and one electron. If the charge on the nucleus corresponds to that
+of a single electron and the system consequently is neutral we have
+a hydrogen atom. Those developments of the quantum theory which
+have made possible its application to atomic structure started with
+the interpretation of the well-known simple spectrum emitted by
+hydrogen. This spectrum consists of a series of lines, the frequencies
+of which are given by the extremely simple Balmer formula
+\[
+\nu = K\left(\frac{1}{(n'')^{2}} - \frac{1}{(n')^{2}}\right),
+\Tag{(2)}
+\]
+where $n''$~and $n'$ are integers. According to the quantum theory
+we shall now assume that the atom possesses a series of stationary
+states characterized by a series of integers, and it can be seen how
+the frequencies given by formula~\Eq{(2)} may be derived from the
+frequency relation if it is assumed that a hydrogen line is connected
+with a radiation emitted during a transition between two
+of these states corresponding to the numbers $n'$~and~$n''$, and if the
+energy in the $n$th~state apart from an arbitrary additive constant
+is supposed to be given by the formula
+\[
+E_{n} = -\frac{Kh}{n^{2}}.
+\Tag{(3)}
+\]
+The negative sign is used because the energy of the atom is
+measured most simply by the work required to remove the electron
+to infinite distance from the nucleus, and we shall assume that the
+numerical value of the expression on the right-hand side of formula~\Eq{(3)}
+is just equal to this work.
+
+As regards the closer description of the stationary states we find
+that the electron will very nearly describe an ellipse with the
+nucleus in the focus. The major axis of this ellipse is connected
+\PageSep{64}
+with the energy of the atom in a simple way, and corresponding to
+the energy values of the stationary states given by formula~\Eq{(3)}
+there are a series of values for the major axis~$2a$ of the orbit of the
+electron given by the formula
+\[
+2a_{n} = \frac{n^{2} e^{2}}{hK},
+\Tag{(4)}
+\]
+where $e$~is the numerical value of the charge of the electron and
+the nucleus.
+
+On the whole we may say that the spectrum of hydrogen shows
+us the \emph{formation of the hydrogen atom}, since the stationary states
+may be regarded as different stages of a process by which the electron
+under the emission of radiation is bound in orbits of smaller
+and smaller dimensions corresponding to states with decreasing
+values of~$n$. It will be seen that this view has certain characteristic
+features in common with the binding process of an electron
+to the nucleus if this were to take place according to the ordinary
+electrodynamics, but that our view differs from it in just such a
+way that it is possible to account for the observed properties of
+hydrogen. In particular it is seen that the final result of the
+binding process leads to a quite definite stationary state of the
+atom, namely that state for which $n = 1$. This state which corresponds
+to the minimum energy of the atom will be called the
+\emph{normal state} of the atom. It may be stated here that the values of
+the energy of the atom and the major axis of the orbit of the
+electron which are found if we put $n = 1$ in formulae \Eq{(3)} and~\Eq{(4)}
+are of the same order of magnitude as the values of the firmness
+of binding of electrons and of the dimensions of the atoms which
+have been obtained from experiments on the electrical and mechanical
+properties of gases. A more accurate check of formulae
+\Eq{(3)} and~\Eq{(4)} can however not be obtained from such a comparison,
+because in such experiments hydrogen is not present in the form
+of simple atoms but as molecules.
+
+The formal basis of the quantum theory consists not only of the
+frequency relation, but also of conditions which permit the determination
+of the stationary states of atomic systems. The latter
+conditions, like that assumed for the frequency, may be regarded as
+natural generalizations of that assumption regarding the interaction
+between simple electrodynamic systems and a surrounding field of
+\PageSep{65}
+electromagnetic radiation which forms the basis of Planck's theory
+of temperature radiation. I shall not here go further into the
+nature of these conditions but only mention that by their means
+the stationary states are characterized by a number of integers,
+the so-called \emph{quantum numbers}. For a purely periodic motion like
+that assumed in the case of the hydrogen atom only a single
+quantum number is necessary for the determination of the stationary
+states. This number determines the energy of the atom and also
+the major axis of the orbit of the electron, but not its \Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity}.
+The energy in the various stationary states, if the small influence
+of the motion of the nucleus is neglected, is given by the following
+formula:
+\[
+E_{n} = -\frac{2\pi^{2} N^{2} e^{4} m}{n^{2} h^{2}},
+\Tag{(5)}
+\]
+where $e$~and $m$ are respectively the charge and the mass of the
+electron, and where for the sake of subsequent applications the
+charge on the nucleus has been designated by~$Ne$.
+
+For the atom of hydrogen $N = 1$, and a comparison with
+equation~\Eq{(3)} leads to the following theoretical expression for~$K$ in
+formula~\Eq{(2)}, namely
+\[
+K = \frac{2\pi^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{3}}.
+\Tag{(6)}
+\]
+This agrees with the empirical value of the constant for the spectrum
+of hydrogen within the limit of accuracy with which the various
+quantities can be determined.
+
+\Section{Hydrogen spectrum and X-ray spectra.} If in the above
+formula we put $N = 2$ which corresponds to an atom consisting of
+an electron revolving around a nucleus with a double charge, we
+get values for the energies in the stationary states, which are four
+times larger than the energies in the corresponding states of the
+hydrogen atom, and we obtain the following formula for the
+spectrum which would be emitted by such an atom:
+\[
+\nu = 4K \left(\frac{1}{(n'')^{2}} - \frac{1}{(n')^{2}}\right).
+\Tag{(7)}
+\]
+This formula represents certain lines which have been known for
+some time and which had been attributed to hydrogen on account
+of the great similarity between formulae \Eq{(2)} and~\Eq{(7)} since it had
+\PageSep{66}
+never been anticipated that two different substances could exhibit
+properties so closely resembling each other. According to the theory
+we may, however, expect that the emission of the spectrum given by~\Eq{(7)}
+corresponds to the \emph{first stage of the formation of the helium atom},
+\ie\ to the binding of a first electron by the doubly charged nucleus
+of this atom. This interpretation has been found to agree with
+more recent information. For instance it has been possible to
+obtain this spectrum from pure helium. I have dwelt on this point
+in order to show how this intimate connection between the properties
+of two elements, which at first sight might appear quite
+surprising, is to be regarded as an immediate expression of the
+characteristic simple structure of the nuclear atom. A short time
+after the elucidation of this question, new evidence of extraordinary
+interest was obtained of such a similarity between the properties of
+the elements. I refer to Moseley's fundamental researches on the
+X-ray spectra of the elements. Moseley found that these spectra
+varied in an extremely simple manner from one element to the
+next in the periodic system. It is well known that the lines of
+the X-ray spectra may be divided into groups corresponding to the
+different characteristic absorption regions for X-rays discovered by
+Barkla. As regards the $K$~group which contains the most penetrating
+X-rays, Moseley found that the strongest line for all elements
+investigated could be represented by a formula which with
+a small simplification can be written
+\[
+\nu = N^{2} K \left(\frac{1}{1^{2}} - \frac{1}{2^{2}}\right).
+\Tag{(8)}
+\]
+$K$~is the same constant as in the hydrogen spectrum, and $N$~the
+atomic number. The great significance of this discovery lies in
+the fact that it would seem firmly to establish the view that this
+atomic number is equal to the number of electrons in the atom.
+This assumption had already been used as a basis for work on
+atomic structure and was first stated by van~den Broek. While
+the significance of this aspect of Moseley's discovery was at once
+clear to all, it has on the other hand been more difficult to understand
+the very great similarity between the spectrum of hydrogen
+and the X-ray spectra. This similarity is shown, not only by the
+lines of the $K$~group, but also by groups of less penetrating X-rays.
+\PageSep{67}
+Thus Moseley found for all the elements he investigated that the
+frequencies of the strongest line in the $L$~group may be represented
+by a formula which with a simplification similar to that employed
+in formula~\Eq{(8)} can be written
+\[
+\nu = N^{2} K \left(\frac{1}{2^{2}} - \frac{1}{3^{2}}\right).
+\Tag{(9)}
+\]
+Here again we obtain an expression for the frequency which corresponds
+to a line in the spectrum which would be emitted by the
+\emph{binding of an electron to a nucleus, whose charge is~$Ne$}.
+
+\Section{The fine structure of the hydrogen lines.} This similarity between
+the structure of the X-ray spectra and the hydrogen spectrum
+was still further extended in a very interesting manner by Sommerfeld's
+important theory of the fine structure of the hydrogen lines.
+The calculation given above of the energy in the stationary states
+of the hydrogen system, where each state is characterized by a
+single quantum number, rests upon the assumption that the orbit
+of the electron in the atom is simply periodic. This is, however,
+only approximately true. It is found that if the change in the mass
+of the electron due to its velocity is taken into consideration the
+orbit of the electron no longer remains a simple ellipse, but its
+motion may be described as a \emph{central motion} obtained by superposing
+a slow and uniform rotation upon a simple periodic motion in a
+very nearly elliptical orbit. For a central motion of this kind the
+stationary states are characterized by \emph{two quantum numbers}. In the
+case under consideration one of these may be so chosen that to a
+very close approximation it will determine the energy of the atom
+in the same manner as the quantum number previously used
+determined the energy in the case of a simple elliptical orbit. This
+quantum number which will always be denoted by~$n$ will therefore
+be called the ``principal quantum number.'' Besides this condition,
+which to a very close approximation determines the major axis in the
+rotating and almost elliptical orbit, a second condition will be imposed
+upon the stationary states of a central orbit, namely that the angular
+momentum of the electron about the centre shall be equal to a whole
+multiple of Planck's constant divided by~$2\pi$. The whole number, which
+occurs as a factor in this expression, may be regarded as the second
+quantum number and will be denoted by~$k$. The latter condition fixes
+\PageSep{68}
+the \Chg{excentricity}{eccentricity} of the rotating orbit which in the case of a simple
+periodic orbit was undetermined. It should be mentioned that the
+possible importance of the angular momentum in the quantum theory
+was pointed out by Nicholson before the application of this theory to
+the spectrum of hydrogen, and that a determination of the stationary
+states for the hydrogen atom similar to that employed by Sommerfeld
+was proposed almost simultaneously by Wilson, although the
+latter did not succeed in giving a physical application to his results.
+
+The simplest description of the form of the rotating nearly
+elliptical electronic orbit in the hydrogen atom is obtained by
+considering the chord which passes through the focus and is
+perpendicular to the major axis, the so-called ``parameter.'' The
+length~$2p$ of this parameter is given to a very close approximation
+by an expression of exactly the same form as the expression for the
+major axis, except that $k$~takes the place of~$n$. Using the same
+notation as before we have therefore
+\[
+2a = n^{2}\, \frac{h^{2}}{2\pi^{2} N e^{2} m},\quad
+2p = k^{2}\, \frac{h^{2}}{2\pi^{2} N e^{2} m}.
+\Tag{(10)}
+\]
+For each of the stationary states which had previously been denoted
+by a given value of~$n$, we obtain therefore a set of stationary states
+corresponding to values of~$k$ from $1$ to~$n$. Instead of the simple
+formula~\Eq{(5)} Sommerfeld found a more complicated expression for
+the energy in the stationary states which depends on~$k$ as well as~$n$.
+Taking the variation of the mass of the electron with velocity
+into account and neglecting terms of higher order of magnitude he
+obtained
+\[
+E_{n,k} = -\frac{2\pi^{2} N^{2} e^{4} m}{n^{2} h^{2}}
+ \left[1 + \frac{4\pi^{2} N^{2} e^{4}}{h^{2} c^{2}}\left(-\frac{3}{4n^{2}} + \frac{1}{nk}\right)\right],
+\Tag{(11)}
+\]
+where $c$~is the velocity of light.
+
+Corresponding to each of the energy values for the stationary
+states of the hydrogen atom given by the simple formula~\Eq{(5)} we
+obtain $n$~values differing only very little from one another, since
+the second term within the bracket is very small. With the aid of
+the general frequency relation~\Eq{(1)} we therefore obtain a number of
+components with nearly coincident frequencies instead of each
+hydrogen line given by the simple formula~\Eq{(2)}. Sommerfeld has
+now shown that this calculation actually agrees with measurements
+\PageSep{69}
+of the fine structure. This agreement applies not only to the fine
+structure of the hydrogen lines which is very difficult to measure
+on account of the extreme proximity of the components, but it is
+also possible to account in detail for the fine structure of the helium
+lines given by formula~\Eq{(7)} which has been very carefully investigated
+by Paschen. Sommerfeld in connection with this theory
+also pointed out that formula~\Eq{(11)} could be applied to the X-ray
+spectra. Thus he showed that in the $K$~and $L$ groups pairs of lines
+appeared the differences of whose frequencies could be determined
+by the expression~\Eq{(11)} for the energy in the stationary states which
+correspond to the binding of a single electron by a nucleus of
+charge~$Ne$.
+
+\Section{Periodic table.} In spite of the great formal similarity between
+the X-ray spectra and the hydrogen spectrum indicated by these
+results a far-reaching difference must be assumed to exist between
+the processes which give rise to the appearance of these two types
+of spectra. While the emission of the hydrogen spectrum, like the
+emission of the ordinary optical spectra of other elements, may be
+assumed to be connected with the binding of an electron by an
+atom, observations on the appearance and absorption of X-ray
+spectra clearly indicate that these spectra are connected with a
+process which may be described as a \emph{reorganization of the electronic
+arrangement} after a disturbance within the atom due to the effect
+of external agencies. We should therefore expect that the appearance
+of the X-ray spectra would depend not only upon the direct
+interaction between a single electron and the nucleus, but also on
+the manner in which the electrons are arranged in the completely
+formed atom.
+
+The peculiar manner in which the properties of the elements
+vary with the atomic number, as expressed in the periodic system,
+provides a guide of great value in considering this latter problem.
+A simple survey of this system is given in \Fig{1}. The number preceding
+each element indicates the atomic number, and the elements
+within the various vertical columns form the different ``periods'' of
+the system. The lines, which connect pairs of elements in successive
+columns, indicate homologous properties of such elements. Compared
+with usual representations of the periodic system, this method,
+\PageSep{70}
+proposed more than twenty years ago by Julius Thomsen, of indicating
+the periodic variations in the properties of the elements is
+more suited for comparison with theories of atomic constitution.
+The meaning of the frames round certain sequences of elements
+within the later periods of the table will be explained later. They
+refer to certain characteristic features of the theory of atomic
+constitution.
+\Figure{1}{70}
+
+In an explanation of the periodic system it is natural to assume
+a division of the electrons in the atom into distinct groups
+in such a manner that the grouping of the elements in the system
+is attributed to the gradual formation of the groups of electrons
+in the atoms as the atomic number increases. Such a grouping
+\PageSep{71}
+of the electrons in the atom has formed a prominent part of all
+more detailed views of atomic structure ever since J.~J. Thomson's
+famous attempt to explain the periodic system on the basis
+of an investigation of the stability of various electronic configurations.
+Although Thomson's assumption regarding the distribution
+of the positive electricity in the atom is not consistent with more
+recent experimental evidence, nevertheless his work has exerted
+great influence upon the later development of the atomic theory on
+account of the many original ideas which it contained.
+
+With the aid of the information concerning the binding of
+electrons by the nucleus obtained from the theory of the hydrogen
+spectrum I attempted in the same paper in which this theory was
+set forth to sketch in broad outlines a picture of the structure of
+the nucleus atom. In this it was assumed that each electron in its
+normal state moved in a manner analogous to the motion in
+the last stages of the binding of a single electron by a nucleus.
+As in Thomson's theory, it was assumed that the electrons moved
+in circular orbits and that the electrons in each separate group
+during this motion occupied positions with reference to one another
+corresponding to the vertices of plane regular polygons. Such an
+arrangement is frequently described as a distribution of the electrons
+in ``rings.'' By means of these assumptions it was possible to
+account for the orders of magnitude of the dimensions of the atoms
+as well as the firmness with which the electrons were bound by the
+atom, a measure of which may be obtained by means of experiments
+on the excitation of the various types of spectra. It was not
+possible, however, in this way to arrive at a detailed explanation
+of the characteristic properties of the elements even after it had
+become apparent from the results of Moseley and the work of
+Sommerfeld and others that this simple picture ought to be extended
+to include orbits in the fully formed atom characterized by
+higher quantum numbers corresponding to previous stages in the
+formation of the hydrogen atom. This point has been especially
+emphasized by Vegard.
+
+The difficulty of arriving at a satisfactory picture of the atom is
+intimately connected with the difficulty of accounting for the pronounced
+``stability'' which the properties of the elements demand.
+As I emphasized when considering the formation of the hydrogen
+\PageSep{72}
+atom, the postulates of the quantum theory aim directly at this
+point, but the results obtained in this way for an atom containing
+a single electron do not permit of a direct elucidation of problems
+like that of the distribution in groups of the electrons in an atom
+containing several electrons. If we imagine that the electrons in
+the groups of the atom are orientated relatively to one another at any
+moment, like the vertices of regular polygons, and rotating in either
+circles or ellipses, the postulates do not give sufficient information to
+determine the difference in the stability of electronic configurations
+with different numbers of electrons in the groups.
+
+The peculiar character of stability of the atomic structure, demanded
+by the properties of the elements, is brought out in an
+interesting way by Kossel in two important papers. In the first
+paper he shows that a more detailed explanation of the origin of
+the high frequency spectra can be obtained on the basis of the
+group structure of the atom. He assumes that a line in the X-ray
+spectrum is due to a process which may be described as follows: an
+electron is removed from the atom by some external action after
+which an electron in one of the other groups takes its place; this
+exchange of place may occur in as many ways as there are groups
+of more loosely bound electrons. This view of the origin of the
+characteristic X-rays afforded a simple explanation of the peculiar
+absorption phenomena observed. It has also led to the prediction
+of certain simple relations between the frequencies of the X-ray
+lines from one and the same element and has proved to be a suitable
+basis for the classification of the complete spectrum. However it has
+not been possible to develop a theory which reconciles in a satisfactory
+way Sommerfeld's work on the fine structure of the X-ray
+lines with Kossel's general scheme. As we shall see later the
+adoption of a new point of view when considering the stability of
+the atom renders it possible to bring the different results in a natural
+way in connection with one another.
+
+In his second paper Kossel investigates the possibilities for an
+explanation of the periodic system on the basis of the atomic theory.
+Without entering further into the problem of the causes of the
+division of the electrons into groups, or the reasons for the different
+stability of the various electronic configurations, he points out in
+connection with ideas which had already played a part in Thomson's
+\PageSep{73}
+theory, how the periodic system affords evidence of a periodic appearance
+of especially stable configurations of electrons. These configurations
+appear in the neutral atoms of elements occupying the
+final position in each period in \Fig{1}, and the stability in question is
+assumed in order to explain not only the inactive chemical properties
+of these elements but also the characteristic active properties of the
+immediately preceding or succeeding elements. If we consider for
+instance an inactive gas like argon, the atomic number of which is~$18$,
+we must assume that the $18$~electrons in the atom are arranged in
+an exceedingly regular configuration possessing a very marked
+stability. The pronounced electronegative character of the preceding
+element, chlorine, may then be explained by supposing the neutral
+atom which contains only $17$~electrons to possess a tendency to
+capture an additional electron. This gives rise to a negative chlorine
+ion with a configuration of $18$~electrons similar to that occurring
+in the neutral argon atom. On the other hand the marked electropositive
+character of potassium may be explained by supposing
+one of the $19$~electrons in the neutral atom to be as it were superfluous,
+and that this electron therefore is easily lost; the rest of the
+atom forming a positive ion of potassium having a constitution similar
+to that of the argon atom. In a corresponding manner it is possible
+to account for the electronegative and electropositive character of
+elements like sulphur and calcium, whose atomic numbers are $16$ and~$20$.
+In contrast to chlorine and potassium these elements are divalent,
+and the stable configuration of $18$~electrons is formed by the addition
+of two electrons to the sulphur atom and by the loss of two electrons
+from the calcium atom. Developing these ideas Kossel has succeeded
+not only in giving interesting explanations of a large number of
+chemical facts, but has also been led to certain general conclusions
+about the grouping of the electrons in elements belonging to the
+first periods of the periodic system, which in certain respects are
+in conformity with the results to be discussed in the following
+paragraphs. Kossel's\Pagelabel{73} work was later continued in an interesting
+manner by Ladenburg with special reference to the grouping of the
+electrons in atoms of elements belonging to the later periods of the
+periodic table. It will be seen that Ladenburg's conclusions also
+exhibit points of similarity with the results which we shall discuss
+later.
+\PageSep{74}
+
+\Section{Recent atomic models.} Up to the present time it has not been
+possible to obtain a satisfactory account based upon a consistent application
+of the quantum theory to the nuclear atom of the ultimate
+cause of the pronounced stability of certain arrangements of electrons.
+Nevertheless it has been apparent for some time that the solution
+should be sought for by investigating the possibilities of a \emph{spatial
+distribution of the electronic orbits} in the atom instead of limiting
+the investigation to configurations in which all electrons belonging
+to a particular group move in the same plane as was assumed for
+simplicity in my first papers on the structure of the atom. The
+necessity of assuming a spatial distribution of the configurations
+of electrons has been drawn attention to by various writers. Born
+and Landé, in connection with their investigations of the structure
+and properties of crystals, have pointed out that the assumption of
+spatial configurations appears necessary for an explanation of these
+properties. Landé has pursued this question still further, and as
+will be mentioned later has proposed a number of different ``spatial
+atomic models'' in which the electrons in each separate group of
+the atom at each moment form configurations possessing regular
+polyhedral symmetry. These models constitute in certain respects
+a distinct advance, although they have not led to decisive results
+on questions of the stability of atomic structure.
+
+The importance of spatial electronic configurations has, in addition,
+been pointed out by Lewis and Langmuir in connection with their
+atomic models. Thus Lewis, who in several respects independently
+came to the same conclusions as Kossel, suggested that the number~$8$
+characterizing the first groups of the periodic system might indicate
+a constitution of the outer atomic groups where the electrons
+within each group formed a configuration like the corners of a cube.
+He emphasized how a configuration of this kind leads to instructive
+models of the molecular structure of chemical combinations. It is
+to be remarked, however, that such a ``static'' model of electronic
+configuration will not be possible if we assume the forces within
+the atom to be due exclusively to the electric charges of the
+particles. Langmuir, who has attempted to develop Lewis' conceptions
+still further and to account not only for the occurrence of
+the first octaves, but also for the longer periods of the periodic
+system, supposes therefore the structure of the atoms to be governed
+\PageSep{75}
+by forces whose nature is unknown to us. He conceives the atom
+to possess a ``cellular structure,'' so that each electron is in advance
+assigned a place in a cell and these cells are arranged in shells in
+such a manner, that the various shells from the nucleus of the atom
+outward contain exactly the same number of places as the periods
+in the periodic system proceeding in the direction of increasing
+atomic number. Langmuir's work has attracted much attention
+among chemists, since it has to some extent thrown light on the
+conceptions with which empirical chemical science is concerned.
+On his theory the explanation of the properties of the various
+elements is based on a number of postulates about the structure of
+the atoms formulated for that purpose. Such a descriptive theory
+is sharply differentiated from one where an attempt is made to
+explain the specific properties of the elements with the aid of
+general laws applying to the interaction between the particles in
+each atom. The principal task of this lecture will consist in an
+attempt to show that an advance along these lines appears by no
+means hopeless, but on the contrary that with the aid of a consistent
+application of the postulates of the quantum theory it
+actually appears possible to obtain an insight into the structure
+and stability of the atom.
+
+
+\Chapter{II.}{Series Spectra and the Capture of Electrons
+by\protect~Atoms}
+
+We attack the problem of atomic constitution by asking the
+question: ``How may an atom be formed by the successive capture
+and binding of the electrons one by one in the field of force surrounding
+the nucleus?''
+
+Before attempting to answer this question it will first be
+necessary to consider in more detail what the quantum theory
+teaches us about the general character of the binding process. We
+have already seen how the hydrogen spectrum gives us definite
+information about the course of this process of binding the electron
+by the nucleus. In considering the formation of the atoms of other
+elements we have also in their spectra sources for the elucidation
+of the formation processes, but the direct information obtained in
+this way is not so complete as in the case of the hydrogen atom.
+For an element of atomic number~$N$ the process of formation may
+\PageSep{76}
+be regarded as occurring in $N$~stages, corresponding with the successive
+binding of $N$~electrons in the field of the nucleus. A spectrum
+must be assumed to correspond to each of these binding processes;
+but only for the first two elements, hydrogen and helium, do we
+possess a detailed knowledge of these spectra. For other elements
+of higher atomic number, where several spectra will be connected
+with the formation of the atom, we are at present acquainted with
+only two types, called the ``arc'' and ``spark'' spectra respectively,
+according to the experimental conditions of excitation. Although
+these spectra show a much more complicated structure than the
+hydrogen spectrum, given by formula~\Eq{(2)} and the helium spectrum
+given by formula~\Eq{(7)}, nevertheless in many cases it has been
+possible to find simple laws for the frequencies exhibiting a close
+analogy with the laws expressed by these formulae.
+
+\Section{Arc and spark spectra.} If for the sake of simplicity we disregard
+the complex structure shown by the lines of most spectra
+(occurrence of doublets, triplets etc.), the frequency of the lines of
+many arc spectra can be represented to a close approximation by
+the Rydberg formula
+\[
+\nu = \frac{K}{(n'' + \alpha_{k''})^{2}} - \frac{K}{(n' + \alpha_{k'})^{2}},
+\Tag{(12)}
+\]
+where $n'$~and $n''$ are integral numbers, $K$~the same constant as in
+the hydrogen spectrum, while $\alpha_{k'}$~and $\alpha_{k''}$ are two constants belonging
+to a set characteristic of the element. A spectrum with a
+structure of this kind is, like the hydrogen spectrum, called a series
+spectrum, since the lines can be arranged into series in which the
+frequencies converge to definite limiting values. These series are
+for example represented by formula~\Eq{(12)} if, using two definite
+constants for $\alpha_{k''}$~and~$\alpha_{k'}$, $n''$~remains unaltered, while $n'$~assumes a
+series of successive, gradually increasing integral values.
+
+Formula~\Eq{(12)} applies only approximately, but it is always found
+that the frequencies of the spectral lines can be written, as in
+formulae \Eq{(2)} and~\Eq{(12)}, as a difference of two functions of integral
+numbers. Thus the latter formula applies accurately, if the
+quantities~$\alpha_{k}$ are not considered as constants, but as representatives
+of a set of series of numbers~$\alpha_{k}(n)$ characteristic of the element,
+whose values for increasing~$n$ within each series quickly approach
+\PageSep{77}
+a constant limiting value. The fact that the frequencies of the
+spectra always appear as the difference of two terms, the so-called
+``spectral terms,'' from the combinations of which the complete
+spectrum is formed, has been pointed out by Ritz, who with the
+establishment of the combination principle has greatly advanced
+the study of the spectra. The quantum theory offers an immediate
+interpretation of this principle, since, according to the frequency
+relation we are led to consider the lines as due to transitions
+between stationary states of the atom, just as in the hydrogen
+spectrum, only in the spectra of the other elements we have to do
+not with a single series of stationary states, but with a set of such
+series. From formula~\Eq{(12)} we thus obtain for an arc spectrum---if
+we temporarily disregard the structure of the individual lines---information
+about an ensemble of stationary states, for which the
+energy of the atom in the $n$th~state of the $k$th~series is given by
+\[
+E_{k}(n) = -\frac{Kh}{(n + \alpha_{k})^{2}}
+\Tag{(13)}
+\]
+very similar to the simple formula~\Eq{(3)} for the energy in the stationary
+states of the hydrogen atom.
+
+As regards the spark spectra, the structure of which has been
+cleared up mainly by Fowler's investigations, it has been possible
+in the case of many elements to express the frequencies approximately
+by means of a formula of exactly the same type as~\Eq{(12)},
+only with the difference that~$K$, just as in the helium spectrum
+given by formula~\Eq{(7)}, is replaced by a constant, which is four times
+as large. For the spark spectra, therefore, the energy values in the
+corresponding stationary states of the atom will be given by an
+expression of the same type as~\Eq{(13)}, only with the difference that
+$K$~is replaced by~$4K$.
+
+This remarkable similarity between the structure of these types
+of spectra and the simple spectra given by \Eq{(2)}~and~\Eq{(7)} is explained
+simply by assuming the arc spectra to be connected with the \emph{last
+stage in the formation of the neutral atom} consisting in the capture
+and binding of the $N$th~electron. On the other hand the spark
+spectra are connected with the \emph{last stage but one in the formation
+of the atom}, namely the binding of the $(N - 1)$th~electron. In these
+cases the field of force in which the electron moves will be much
+\PageSep{78}
+the same as that surrounding the nucleus of a hydrogen or helium
+atom respectively, at least in the earlier stages of the binding
+process, where during the greater part of its revolution it moves
+at a distance from the nucleus which is large in proportion to the
+dimensions of the orbits of the electrons previously bound. From
+analogy with formula~\Eq{(3)} giving the stationary states of the
+hydrogen atom, we shall therefore assume that the numerical value
+of the expression on the right-hand side of~\Eq{(13)} will be equal to the
+work required to remove the last captured electron from the atom,
+the binding of which gives rise to the arc spectrum of the element.
+
+\Section{Series diagram.} While the origin of the arc and spark spectra
+was to this extent immediately interpreted on the basis of the
+original simple theory of the hydrogen spectrum, it was Sommerfeld's
+theory of the fine structure of the hydrogen lines which first gave
+us a clear insight into the characteristic difference between the
+hydrogen spectrum and the spark spectrum of helium on the one
+hand, and the arc and spark spectra of other elements on the other.
+When we consider the binding not of the first but of the subsequent
+electrons in the atom, the orbit of the electron under consideration---at
+any rate in the latter stages of the binding process where the
+electron last bound comes into intimate interaction with those
+previously bound---will no longer be to a near approximation a
+closed ellipse, but on the contrary will to a first approximation be a
+central orbit of the same type as in the hydrogen atom, when we
+take into account the change with velocity in the mass of the
+electron. This motion, as we have seen, may be resolved into a
+plane periodic motion upon which a uniform rotation is superposed
+in the plane of the orbit; only the superposed rotation will in this
+case be comparatively much more rapid and the deviation of the
+periodic orbit from an ellipse much greater than in the case of the
+hydrogen atom. For an orbit of this type the stationary states, just
+as in the theory of the fine structure, will be determined by two
+quantum numbers which we shall denote by $n$~and~$k$, connected in
+a very simple manner with the kinematic properties of the orbit.
+For brevity I shall only mention that while the quantum number~$k$
+is connected with the value of the constant angular momentum
+of the electron about the centre in the simple manner previously
+\PageSep{79}
+indicated, the determination of the principal quantum number~$n$
+requires an investigation of the whole course of the orbit and for
+an arbitrary central orbit will not be related in a simple way to
+the dimensions of the rotating periodic orbit if this deviates essentially
+from a Keplerian ellipse.
+\Figure{2}{79}
+
+These results are represented in \Fig{2} which is a reproduction
+of an illustration I have used on a previous occasion
+(see Essay~II, \PageRef{30}), and which gives a survey of the origin
+of the sodium spectrum. The black dots represent the stationary
+states corresponding to the various series of spectral terms,
+shown on the right by the letters $S$,~$P$,~$D$ and~$B$. These letters
+correspond to the usual notations employed in spectroscopic
+literature and indicate the nature of the series (sharp series,
+principal series, diffuse series, etc.)\ obtained by combinations of
+the corresponding spectral terms. The distances of the separate
+points from the vertical line at the right of the figure are proportional
+to the numerical value of the energy of the atom given
+by equation~\Eq{(13)}. The oblique, black arrows indicate finally the
+transitions between the stationary states giving rise to the
+appearance of the lines in the commonly observed sodium
+spectrum. The values of $n$~and $k$ attached to the various states
+indicate the quantum numbers, which, according to Sommerfeld's
+theory, from a preliminary consideration might be regarded as
+characterizing the orbit of the outer electron. For the sake of
+convenience the states which were regarded as corresponding to
+the same value of~$n$ are connected by means of dotted lines, and these
+are so drawn that their vertical asymptotes correspond to the
+\PageSep{80}
+terms in the hydrogen spectrum which belong to the same value
+of the principal quantum number. The course of the curves illustrates
+how the deviation from the hydrogen terms may be expected
+to decrease with increasing values of~$k$, corresponding to states,
+where the minimum distance between the electron in its revolution
+and the nucleus constantly increases.
+
+It should be noted that even though the theory represents the
+principal features of the structure of the series spectra it has not
+yet been possible to give a detailed account of the spectrum of any
+element by a closer investigation of the electronic orbits which may
+occur in a simple field of force possessing central symmetry. As
+I have mentioned already the lines of most spectra show a complex
+structure. In the sodium spectrum for instance the lines of the
+principal series are doublets indicating that to each $P$-term not
+one stationary state, but two such states correspond with slightly
+different values of the energy. This difference is so little that
+it would not be recognizable in a diagram on the same scale as
+\Fig{2}. The appearance of these doublets is undoubtedly due to
+the small deviations from central symmetry of the field of force
+originating from the inner system in consequence of which the
+general type of motion of the external electron will possess a
+more complicated character than that of a simple central motion.
+As a result the stationary states must be characterized by more
+than two quantum numbers, in the same way that the occurrence
+of deviations of the orbit of the electron in the hydrogen atom from
+a simple periodic orbit requires that the stationary states of this
+atom shall be characterized by more than one quantum number.
+Now the rules of the quantum theory lead to the introduction of
+a third quantum number through the condition that the resultant
+angular momentum of the atom, multiplied by~$2\pi$, is equal to an
+entire multiple of Planck's constant. This determines the orientation
+of the orbit of the outer electron relative to the axis of the
+inner system.
+
+In this way Sommerfeld, Landé and others have shown that it
+is possible not only to account in a formal way for the complex
+structure of the lines of the series spectra, but also to obtain a
+promising interpretation of the complicated effect of external
+magnetic fields on this structure. We shall not enter here on these
+\PageSep{81}
+problems but shall confine ourselves to the problem of the fixation
+of the two quantum numbers $n$~and~$k$, which to a first approximation
+describe the orbit of the outer electron in the stationary
+states, and whose determination is a matter of prime importance
+in the following discussion of the formation of the atom. In
+the determination of these numbers we at once encounter difficulties
+of a profound nature, which---as we shall see---are intimately
+connected with the question of the remarkable stability of atomic
+structure. I shall here only remark that the values of the quantum
+number~$n$, given in the figure, undoubtedly \Chg{can not}{cannot} be retained,
+neither for the~$S$ nor the $P$~series. On the other hand, so far as
+the values employed for the quantum number~$k$ are concerned, it
+may be stated with certainty, that the interpretation of the properties
+of the orbits, which they indicate, is correct. A starting
+point for the investigation of this question has been obtained from
+considerations of an entirely different kind from those previously
+mentioned, which have made it possible to establish a close connection
+between the motion in the atom and the appearance of
+spectral lines.
+
+\Section{Correspondence principle.} So far as the principles of the
+quantum theory are concerned, the point which has been emphasized
+hitherto is the radical departure of these principles from our
+usual conceptions of mechanical and electrodynamical phenomena.
+As I have attempted to show in recent years, it appears
+possible, however, to adopt a point of view which suggests that the
+quantum theory may, nevertheless, be regarded as a rational
+generalization of our ordinary conceptions. As may be seen from
+the postulates of the quantum theory, and particularly the frequency
+relation, a direct connection between the spectra and the motion
+of the kind required by the classical dynamics is excluded, but at
+the same time the form of these postulates leads us to another
+relation of a remarkable nature. Let us consider an electrodynamic
+system and inquire into the nature of the radiation which would
+result from the motion of the system on the basis of the ordinary
+conceptions. We imagine the motion to be decomposed into purely
+harmonic oscillations, and the radiation is assumed to consist of
+the simultaneous emission of series of electromagnetic waves
+\PageSep{82}
+possessing the same frequency as these harmonic components and
+intensities which depend upon the amplitudes of the components.
+An investigation of the formal basis of the quantum theory shows
+us now, that it is possible to trace the question of the origin of the
+radiation processes which accompany the various transitions back
+to an investigation of the various harmonic components, which
+appear in the motion of the atom. The possibility, that a particular
+transition shall occur, may be regarded as being due to the
+presence of a definitely assignable ``corresponding'' component in
+the motion. This principle of correspondence at the same time
+throws light upon a question mentioned several times previously,
+namely the relation between the number of quantum numbers,
+which must be used to describe the stationary states of an atom,
+and the types to which the orbits of the electrons belong. The
+classification of these types can be based very simply on a decomposition
+of the motion into its harmonic components. Time does
+not permit me to consider this question any further, and I shall
+confine myself to a statement of some simple conclusions, which
+the correspondence principle permits us to draw concerning the
+occurrence of transitions between various pairs of stationary states.
+These conclusions are of decisive importance in the subsequent
+argument.
+
+The simplest example of such a conclusion is obtained by
+considering an atomic system, which contains a particle describing
+a \emph{purely periodic orbit}, and where the stationary states are characterized
+by a single quantum number~$n$. In this case the motion
+can according to Fourier's theorem be decomposed into a simple
+series of harmonic oscillations whose frequency may be written~$\tau\omega$,
+where $\tau$~is a whole number, and $\omega$~is the frequency of revolution
+in the orbit. It can now be shown that a transition between two
+stationary states, for which the values of the quantum number are
+respectively equal to $n'$~and~$n''$, will correspond to a harmonic
+component, for which $\tau = n' - n''$. This throws at once light upon
+the remarkable difference which exists between the possibilities
+of transitions between the stationary states of a hydrogen atom
+on the one hand and of a simple system consisting of an electric
+particle capable of executing simple harmonic oscillations about a
+position of equilibrium on the other. For the latter system, which
+\PageSep{83}
+is frequently called a Planck oscillator, the energy in the stationary
+states is determined by the familiar formula $E = nh\omega$, and with the
+aid of the frequency relation we obtain therefore for the radiation
+which will be emitted during a transition between two stationary
+states $\nu = (n' - n'') \omega$. Now, an important assumption, which is not
+only essential in Planck's theory of temperature radiation, but
+which also appears necessary to account for the molecular absorption
+in the infra-red region of radiation, states that a harmonic oscillator
+will only emit and absorb radiation, for which the frequency~$\nu$ is
+equal to the frequency of oscillation~$\omega$ of the oscillator. We are
+therefore compelled to assume that in the case of the oscillator
+transitions can occur only between stationary states which are
+characterized by quantum numbers differing by only one unit,
+while in the hydrogen spectrum represented by formula~\Eq{(2)} all
+possible transitions could take place between the stationary states
+given by formula~\Eq{(5)}. From the point of view of the principle of
+correspondence it is seen, however, that this apparent difficulty is
+explained by the occurrence in the motion of the hydrogen atom,
+as opposed to the motion of the oscillator, of harmonic components
+corresponding to values of~$\tau$, which are different from~$1$; or using
+a terminology well known from acoustics, there appear overtones
+in the motion of the hydrogen atom.
+
+Another simple example of the application of the correspondence
+principle is afforded by a \emph{central motion}, to the investigation of
+which the explanation of the series spectra in the first approximation
+may be reduced. Referring once more to the figure of the
+sodium spectrum, we see that the black arrows, which correspond
+to the spectral lines appearing under the usual conditions of
+excitation, only connect pairs of points in consecutive rows. Now
+it is found that this remarkable limitation of the occurrence of
+combinations between spectral terms may quite naturally be
+explained by an investigation of the harmonic components into
+which a central motion can be resolved. It can readily be shown
+that such a motion can be decomposed into two series of harmonic
+components, whose frequencies can be expressed by $\tau\omega + \sigma$ and
+$\tau\omega - \sigma$ respectively, where $\tau$~is a whole number, $\omega$~the frequency of
+revolution in the rotating periodic orbit and $\sigma$~the frequency of the
+superposed rotation. These components correspond with transitions
+\PageSep{84}
+where the principal number~$n$ decreases by $\tau$~units, while the
+quantum number~$k$ decreases or increases, respectively, by one
+unit, corresponding exactly with the transitions indicated by the
+black arrows in the figure. This may be considered as a very
+important result, because we may say, that the quantum theory,
+which for the first time has offered a simple interpretation of the
+fundamental principle of combination of spectral lines has at the
+same time removed the mystery which has hitherto adhered
+to the application of this principle on account of the apparent
+capriciousness of the appearance of predicted combination lines.
+Especially attention may be drawn to the simple interpretation
+which the quantum theory offers of the appearance observed by
+Stark and his collaborators of certain new series of lines, which do
+not appear under ordinary circumstances, but which are excited
+when the emitting atoms are subject to intense external electric
+fields. In fact, on the correspondence principle this is immediately
+explained from an examination of the perturbations in the motion
+of the outer electron which give rise to the appearance in this
+motion---besides the harmonic components already present in a
+simple central orbit---of a number of constituent harmonic vibrations
+of new type and of amplitudes proportional to the intensity
+of the external forces.
+
+It may be of interest to note that an investigation of the
+limitation of the possibility of transitions between stationary
+states, based upon a simple consideration of conservation of angular
+momentum during the process of radiation, does not, contrary to
+what has previously been supposed (compare Essay~II, \PageRef{62}),
+suffice to throw light on the remarkably simple structure of series
+spectra illustrated by the figure. As mentioned above we must
+assume that the ``complexity'' of the spectral terms, corresponding
+to given values of $n$~and~$k$, which we witness in the fine
+structure of the spectral lines, may be ascribed to states, corresponding
+to different values of this angular momentum, in
+which the plane of the electronic orbit is orientated in a different
+manner, relative to the configuration of the previously bound
+electrons in the atom. Considerations of conservation of angular
+momentum can, in connection with the series spectra, therefore only
+contribute to an understanding of the limitation of the possibilities
+\PageSep{85}
+of combination observed in the peculiar laws applying to the
+number of components in the complex structure of the lines. So
+far as the last question is concerned, such considerations offer a
+direct support for the consequences of the correspondence principle.
+
+
+\Chapter{III.}{Formation of Atoms and the Periodic Table}
+
+A correspondence has been shown to exist between the motion
+of the electron last captured and the occurrence of transitions
+between the stationary states corresponding to the various stages
+of the binding process. This fact gives a point of departure for a
+choice between the numerous possibilities which present themselves
+when considering the formation of the atoms by the successive
+capture and binding of the electrons. Among the processes which
+are conceivable and which according to the quantum theory might
+occur in the atom we shall reject those whose occurrence \Chg{can not}{cannot} be
+regarded as consistent with a correspondence of the required nature.
+
+\Section{First Period. Hydrogen---Helium.} It will not be necessary to
+concern ourselves long with the question of the constitution of the
+hydrogen atom. From what has been said previously we may assume
+that the final result of the process of \emph{binding of the first electron} in
+any atom will be a stationary state, where the energy of the atom
+is given by~\Eq{(5)}, if we put $n = 1$, or more precisely by formula~\Eq{(11)},
+if we put $n = 1$ and $k = 1$. The orbit of the electron will be a circle
+whose radius will be given by formulae~\Eq{(10)}, if $n$~and $k$ are each
+put equal to~$1$. Such an orbit will be called a $1$-quantum orbit,
+and in general an orbit for which the principal quantum number
+has a given value~$n$ will be called an $n$-quantum orbit. Where it
+is necessary to differentiate between orbits corresponding to various
+values of the quantum number~$k$, a central orbit, characterized by
+given values of the quantum numbers $n$~and~$k$, will be referred to
+as an $n_{k}$~orbit.
+
+In the question of the constitution of the helium atom we meet
+the much more complicated problem of the \emph{binding of the second
+electron}. Information about this binding process may, however, be
+obtained from the arc spectrum of helium. This spectrum, as
+opposed to most other simple spectra, consists of two complete
+systems of lines with frequencies given by formulae of the type~\Eq{(12)}.
+\PageSep{86}
+On this account helium was at first assumed to be a mixture
+of two different gases, ``orthohelium'' and ``parhelium,'' but now we
+know that the two spectra simply mean that the binding of the second
+electron can occur in two different ways. A theoretical explanation of
+the main features of the helium spectrum has recently been attempted
+in an interesting paper by Landé. He supposes the emission of the
+orthohelium spectrum to be due to transitions between stationary
+states where both electrons move in the same plane and revolve
+in the same sense. The parhelium spectrum, on the other hand, is
+ascribed by him to stationary states where the planes of the orbits
+form an angle with each other. Dr~Kramers and I have made a
+closer investigation of the interaction between the two orbits in
+the different stationary states. The results of our investigation
+which was begun several years before the appearance of Landé's
+work have not yet been published. Without going into details
+I may say, that even though our results in several respects differ
+materially from those of Landé (compare Essay~II, \PageRef{56}), we agree
+with his general conclusions concerning the origin of the orthohelium
+and parhelium spectra.
+
+The final result of the binding of the second electron is intimately
+related to the origin of the two helium spectra. Important
+information on this point has been obtained recently by Franck
+and his co-workers. As is well known he has thrown light upon
+many features of the structure of the atom and of the origin
+of spectra by observing the effect of bombarding atoms by
+electrons of various velocities. A short time ago these experiments
+showed that the impact of electrons could bring helium into a
+``metastable'' state from which the atom cannot return to its
+normal state by means of a simple transition accompanied by the
+emission of radiation, but only by means of a process analogous to
+a chemical reaction involving interaction with atoms of other
+elements. This result is closely connected with the fact that the
+binding of the second electron can occur in two different ways, as
+is shown by the occurrence of two distinct spectra. Thus it is
+evident from Franck's experiments that the normal state of the
+atom is the last stage in the binding process involving the emission
+of the parhelium spectrum by which the electron last captured as
+well as the one first captured will be bound in a $1_{1}$~orbit. The
+\PageSep{87}
+metastable state, on the contrary, is the final stage of the process
+giving the orthohelium spectrum. In this case the second electron,
+as opposed to the first, will move in a $2_{1}$~orbit. This corresponds to
+a firmness of binding which is about six times less than for the
+electron in the normal state of the atom.
+
+If we now consider somewhat more closely this apparently
+surprising result, it is found that a clear grasp of it may be obtained
+from the point of view of correspondence. It can be shown that
+the coherent class of motions to which the orthohelium orbits
+belong does not contain a $1_{1}$~orbit. If on the whole we would claim
+the existence of a state where the two electrons move in $1_{1}$~orbits
+in the same plane, and if in addition it is claimed that the motion
+should possess the periodic properties necessary for the definition
+of stationary states, then there seems that no possibility is afforded
+other than the assumption that the two electrons move around the
+nucleus in one and the same orbit, in such a manner that at each
+moment they are situated at the ends of a diameter. This extremely
+simple ring-configuration might be expected to correspond to
+the firmest possible binding of the electrons in the atom, and it
+was on this account proposed as a model for the helium atom in
+my first paper on atomic structure. If, however, we inquire about
+the possibility of a transition from one of the orthohelium states
+to a configuration of this type we meet conditions which are very
+different from those which apply to transitions between two of
+the orthohelium orbits. In fact, the occurrence of each of these
+transitions is due to the existence of well-defined corresponding
+constituent harmonic vibration in the central orbits which the outer
+electron describes in the class of motions to which the stationary
+states belong. The transition we have to discuss, on the other
+hand, is one by which the last captured electron is transferred from
+a state in which it is moving ``outside'' the other to a state in which
+it moves round the nucleus on equal terms with the other electron.
+Now it is impossible to find a series of simple intermediate forms
+for the motion of those two electrons in which the orbit of the last
+captured electron exhibits a sufficient similarity to a central motion
+that for this transition there could be a correspondence of the
+necessary kind. It is therefore evident, that where the two electrons
+move in the same plane, the electron captured last \Chg{can not}{cannot} be
+\PageSep{88}
+bound firmer than in a $2_{1}$~orbit. If, on the other hand, we consider
+the binding process which accompanies the emission of the parhelium
+spectrum and where the electrons in the stationary states move in
+orbits whose planes form angles with one another we meet essentially
+different conditions. A corresponding intimate change in the
+interaction between the electron last captured and the one previously
+bound is not required here for the two electrons in the atom to
+become equivalent. We may therefore imagine the last stage of
+the binding process to take place in a manner similar to those
+stages corresponding to transitions between orbits characterized by
+greater values of $n$~and~$k$.
+
+In the \emph{normal state of the helium atom} the two electrons must
+be assumed to move in equivalent $1_{1}$~orbits. As a first approximation
+these may be described as two circular orbits, whose planes make
+an angle of~$120°$ with one another, in agreement with the conditions
+which the angular momentum of an atom according to the quantum
+theory must satisfy. On account of the interaction between the
+two electrons these planes at the same time turn slowly around
+the fixed impulse axis of the atom. Starting from a distinctly
+different point of view Kemble has recently suggested a similar
+model for the helium atom. He has at the same time directed
+attention to a possible type of motion of very marked symmetry
+in which the electrons during their entire revolution assume
+symmetrical positions with reference to a fixed axis. Kemble has
+not, however, investigated this motion further. Previous to the
+appearance of this paper Kramers had commenced a closer investigation
+of precisely this type of motion in order to find out to what
+extent it was possible from such a calculation to account for the
+firmness with which the electrons are bound in the helium atom,
+that is to account for the ionization potential. Early measurements
+of this potential had given values corresponding approximately to
+that which would result from the ring-configuration already mentioned.
+This requires $17/8$~as much work to remove a single
+electron as is necessary to remove an electron from the hydrogen
+atom in its normal state. As the theoretical value for the latter
+amount of work---which for the sake of simplicity will be represented
+by~$W$---corresponds to an ionization potential of $13.53$~volts,
+the ionization potential of helium would be expected to be $28.8$~volts.
+\PageSep{89}
+Recent and more accurate determinations, however, have
+given a value for the ionization potential of helium which is considerably
+lower and lies in the neighbourhood of $25$~volts. This
+showed therefore the untenability of the ring-configuration quite
+independently of any other considerations. A careful investigation of
+the spatial atomic configuration requires elaborate calculation, and
+Kramers has not yet obtained final results. With the approximation
+to which they have been so far completed the calculations point to
+the possibility of an agreement with the experimental results. The
+final result may be awaited with great interest, since it offers in
+the simplest case imaginable a test of the principles by which we
+are attempting to determine stationary states of atoms containing
+more than one electron.
+
+Hydrogen and helium, as seen in the survey of the periodic
+system given in \Fig{1}, together form the first period in the system
+of elements, since helium is the first of the inactive gases. The great
+difference in the chemical properties of hydrogen and helium is
+closely related to the great difference in the nature of the binding
+of the electron. This is directly indicated by the spectra and
+ionization potentials. While helium possesses the highest known
+ionization potential of all the elements, the binding of the electron
+in the hydrogen atom is sufficiently loose to account for the tendency
+of hydrogen to form positive ions in aqueous solutions and chemical
+combinations. Further consideration of this particular question
+requires, however, a comparison between the nature and firmness
+of the electronic configurations of other atoms, and it can therefore
+not be discussed at the moment.
+
+\Section{Second Period. Lithium---Neon.} When considering the atomic
+structure of elements which contain more than two electrons in the
+neutral atom, we shall assume first of all that what has previously
+been said about the formation of the helium atom will in the main
+features also apply to the capture and binding of the first two
+electrons. These electrons may, therefore, in the normal state of
+the atom be regarded as moving in equivalent orbits characterized
+by the quantum symbol~$1_{1}$. We obtain direct information about
+the \emph{binding of the third electron} from the spectrum of lithium.
+This spectrum shows the existence of a number of series of
+\PageSep{90}
+stationary states, where the firmness with which the last captured
+electron is bound is very nearly the same as in the stationary states
+of the hydrogen atom. These states correspond to orbits where $k$~is
+greater than or equal to~$2$, and where the last captured electron
+moves entirely outside the region where the first two electrons
+move. But in addition this spectrum gives us information about a
+series of states corresponding to $k = 1$ in which the energy differs
+essentially from the corresponding stationary states of the hydrogen
+atom. In these states the last captured electron, even if it remains
+at a considerable distance from the nucleus during the greater part
+of its revolution, will at certain moments during the revolution
+approach to a distance from the nucleus which is of the same order
+of magnitude as the dimensions of the orbits of the previously
+bound electrons. On this account the electrons will be bound with
+a firmness which is considerably greater than that with which the
+electrons are bound in the stationary states of the hydrogen atom
+corresponding to the same value of~$n$.
+
+Now as regards the lithium spectrum as well as the other alkali
+spectra we are so fortunate (see \PageRef{32}) as to possess definite evidence
+about the normal state of the atom from experiments on selective
+absorption. In fact these experiments tell us that the first member
+of the sequence of $S$-terms corresponds to this state. This term
+corresponds to a strength of binding which is only a little more than
+a third of that of the hydrogen atom. We must therefore conclude
+that the outer electron in the normal state of the lithium atom
+moves in a $2_{1}$~orbit, just as the outer electron in the metastable
+state of the helium atom. The reason why the binding of the
+outer electron \Chg{can not}{cannot} proceed to an orbit characterized by a smaller
+value for the total quantum number may also be considered as
+analogous in the two cases. In fact, a transition by which the third
+electron in the lithium atom was ultimately bound in a $1_{1}$~orbit
+would lead to a state in the atom in which the electron would play
+an equivalent part with the two electrons previously bound. Such
+a process would be of a type entirely different from the transitions
+between the stationary states connected with the emission of the
+lithium spectrum, and would, contrary to these, not exhibit a
+correspondence with a harmonic component in the motion of the
+atom.
+\PageSep{91}
+
+We obtain, therefore, a picture of the formation and structure of
+the lithium atom which offers a natural explanation of the great
+difference of the chemical properties of lithium from those of helium
+and hydrogen. This difference is at once explained by the fact that
+the firmness by which the last captured electron is bound in its
+$2_{1}$~orbit in the lithium atom is only about a third of that with which
+the electron in the hydrogen atom is held, and almost five times
+smaller than the firmness of the binding of the electrons in the
+helium atom.
+
+What has been said here applies not alone to the formation of
+the lithium atom, but may also be assumed to apply to the binding
+of the third electron in every atom, so that in contrast to the first
+two electrons which move in $1_{1}$~orbits this may be assumed to move
+in a $2_{1}$~orbit. As regards the \emph{binding of the fourth, fifth and sixth
+electrons} in the atom, we do not possess a similar guide as no simple
+series spectra are known of beryllium, boron and carbon. Although
+conclusions of the same degree of certainty \Chg{can not}{cannot} be reached it
+seems possible, however, to arrive at results consistent with general
+physical and chemical evidence by proceeding by means of considerations
+of the same kind as those applied to the binding of the
+first three electrons. In fact, we shall assume that the fourth, fifth
+and sixth electrons will be bound in $2_{1}$~orbits. The reason why the
+binding of a first electron in an orbit of this type will not prevent the
+capture of the others in two quanta orbits may be ascribed to the fact
+that $2_{1}$~orbits are not circular but very \Chg{excentric}{eccentric}; For example, the
+$3$rd~electron cannot keep the remaining electrons away from the inner
+system in the same way in which the first two electrons bound in
+the lithium atom prevent the third from being bound in a
+$1$-quantum orbit. Thus we shall expect that the $4$th, $5$th and $6$th
+electrons in a similar way to the $3$rd will at certain moments of
+their revolution enter into the region where the first two
+bound electrons move. We must not imagine, however, that these
+visits into the inner system take place at the same time, but
+that the four electrons visit the nucleus separately at equal
+intervals of time. In earlier work on atomic structure it was supposed
+that the electrons in the various groups in the atom moved
+in separate regions within the atom and that at each moment the
+electrons within each separate group were arranged in configurations
+\PageSep{92}
+possessing symmetry like that of a regular polygon or polyhedron.
+Among other things this involved that the electrons in each group
+were supposed to be at the point of the orbit nearest the nucleus
+at the same time. A structure of this kind may be described as one
+where the motions of the electrons within the groups are coupled
+together in a manner which is largely independent of the interaction
+between the various groups. On the contrary, the characteristic
+feature of a structure like that I have suggested is the \emph{intimate
+coupling between the motions of the electrons in the various groups}
+characterized by different quantum numbers, as well as the \emph{greater
+independence in the mode of binding within one and the same group
+of electrons} the orbits of which are characterized by the same
+quantum number. In emphasizing this last feature I have two
+points in mind. Firstly the smaller effect of the presence of previously
+bound electrons on the firmness of binding of succeeding
+electrons in the same group. Secondly the way in which the motions
+of the electrons within the group reflect the independence both of
+the processes by which the group can be formed and by which it
+can be reorganized by change of position of the different electrons
+in the atom after a disturbance by external forces. The last point
+will be considered more closely when we deal with the origin and
+nature of the X-ray spectra; for the present we shall continue the
+consideration of the structure of the atom to which we are led by
+the investigation of the processes connected with the successive
+capture of the electrons.
+
+The preceding considerations enable us to understand the fact
+that the two elements beryllium and boron immediately succeeding
+lithium can appear electropositively with $2$~and $3$~valencies respectively
+in combination with other substances. For like the third
+electron in the lithium atom, the last captured electrons in these
+elements will be much more lightly bound than the first two
+electrons. At the same time we understand why the electropositive
+character of these elements is less marked than in the case of
+lithium, since the electrons in the $2$-quanta orbits will be much
+more firmly bound on account of the stronger field in which they
+are moving. New conditions arise, however, in the case of the
+next element, carbon, as this element in its typical chemical combinations
+\Chg{can not}{cannot} be supposed to occur as an ion, but rather as a
+\PageSep{93}
+neutral atom. This must be assumed to be due not only to the great
+firmness in the binding of the electrons but also to be an essential
+consequence of the symmetrical configuration of the electrons.
+
+With the binding of the $4$th, $5$th and $6$th electrons in $2_{1}$~orbits,
+the spatial symmetry of the regular configuration of the orbits
+must be regarded as steadily increasing, until with the binding of
+the $6$th electron the orbits of the four last bound electrons may be
+expected to form an exceptionally symmetrical configuration in
+which the normals to the planes of the orbits occupy positions
+relative to one another nearly the same as the lines from the centre
+to the vertices of a regular tetrahedron. Such a configuration
+of groups of $2$-quanta orbits in the carbon atom seems capable
+of furnishing a suitable foundation for explaining the structure of
+organic compounds. I shall not discuss this question any further,
+for it would require a thorough study of the interaction between
+the motions of the electrons in the atoms forming the molecule.
+I might mention, however, that the types of molecular models to
+which we are led are very different from the molecular models
+which were suggested in my first papers. In these the chemical
+``valence bonds'' were represented by ``electron rings'' of the same
+type as those which were assumed to compose the groups of
+electrons within the individual atoms. It is nevertheless possible
+to give a general explanation of the chemical properties of the
+elements without touching on those matters at all. This is largely
+due to the fact that the structures of combinations of atoms of the
+same element and of many organic compounds do not have the
+same significance for our purpose as those molecular structures in
+which the individual atoms occur as electrically charged ions. The
+latter kind of compounds, to which the greater number of simple
+inorganic compounds belong, is frequently called ``heteropolar'' and
+possesses a far more typical character than the first compounds
+which are called ``homoeopolar,'' and whose properties to quite a
+different degree exhibit the individual peculiarities of the elements.
+My main purpose will therefore be to consider the fitness which
+the configurations of the electrons in the various atoms offer for
+the formation of ions.
+
+Before leaving the carbon atom I should mention, that a model
+of this atom in which the orbits of the four most lightly bound
+\PageSep{94}
+electrons possess a pronounced tetrahedric symmetry had already
+been suggested by Landé. In order to agree with the measurements
+of the size of the atoms he also assumed that these electrons moved
+in $2_{1}$~orbits. There is, however, this difference between Landé's
+view and that given here, that while Landé deduced the characteristic
+properties of the carbon atom solely from an investigation of
+the simplest form of motion which four electrons can execute
+employing spatial symmetry, our view originates from a consideration
+of the stability of the whole atom. For our assumptions about
+the orbits of the electrons are based directly on an investigation of
+the interaction between these electrons and the first two bound
+electrons. The result is that our model of the carbon atom has
+dynamic properties which are essentially different from the properties
+of Landé's model.
+
+In order to account for the properties of \emph{the elements in the second
+half of the second period} it will first of all be necessary to show
+why the configuration of ten electrons occurring in the neutral atom
+of neon possesses such a remarkable degree of stability. Previously
+it has been assumed that the properties of this configuration were
+due to the interaction between eight electrons which moved in
+equivalent orbits outside the nucleus and an inner group of two
+electrons like that in the helium atom. It will be seen, however,
+that the solution must be sought in an entirely different direction.
+It \Chg{can not}{cannot} be expected that \emph{the $7$th electron} will be bound in a $2_{1}$~orbit
+equivalent to the orbits of the four preceding electrons. The occurrence
+of five such orbits would so definitely destroy the symmetry
+in the interaction of these electrons that it is inconceivable that a
+process resulting in the accession of a fifth electron to this group
+would be in agreement with the correspondence principle. On the
+contrary it will be necessary to assume that the four electrons in
+their exceptionally symmetrical orbital configuration will keep out
+later captured electrons with the result that these electrons will be
+bound in orbits of other types.
+
+The orbits which come into consideration for the $7$th electron in
+the nitrogen atom and the $7$th, $8$th, $9$th and $10$th electrons in the
+atoms of the immediately following elements will be circular orbits
+of the type~$2_{2}$. The diameters of these orbits are considerably larger
+than those of the $l_{1}$~orbits of the first two electrons; on the other
+\PageSep{95}
+hand the outermost part of the \Chg{excentric}{eccentric} $2_{1}$~orbits will extend some
+distance beyond these circular $2_{2}$~orbits. I shall not here discuss the
+capture and binding of these electrons. This requires a further investigation
+of the interaction between the motions of the electrons
+in the two types of $2$-quanta orbits. I shall simply mention, that
+in the atom of neon in which we will assume that there are four
+electrons in $2_{2}$~orbits the planes of these orbits must be regarded not
+only as occupying a position relative to one another characterized
+by a high degree of spatial symmetry, but also as possessing a
+configuration harmonizing with the four elliptical $2_{1}$~orbits. An
+interaction of this kind in which the orbital planes do not
+coincide can be attained only if the configurations in both subgroups
+exhibit a systematic deviation from tetrahedral symmetry.
+This will have the result that the electron groups with $2$-quanta
+orbits in the neon atom will have only a single axis of symmetry
+which must be supposed to coincide with the axis of symmetry of
+the innermost group of two electrons.
+
+Before leaving the description of the elements within the second
+period it may be pointed out that the above considerations offer a
+basis for interpreting that tendency of the neutral atoms of oxygen
+and fluorine for capturing further electrons which is responsible for
+the marked electronegative character of these elements. In fact,
+this tendency may be ascribed to the fact that the orbits of
+the last captured electrons will find their place within the region,
+in which the previously captured electrons move in $2_{1}$~orbits. This
+suggests an explanation of the great difference between the properties
+of the elements in the latter half of the second period of the
+periodic system and those of the elements in the first half, in whose
+atoms there is only a single type of $2$-quanta orbits.
+
+\Section{Third Period. Sodium---Argon.} We shall now consider the
+structure of atoms of elements in the third period of the periodic
+system. This brings us immediately 'to the question of \emph{the binding
+of the $11$th electron} in the atom. Here we meet conditions which
+in some respects are analogous to those connected with the binding
+of the $7$th electron. The same type of argument that applied to
+the carbon atom shows that the symmetry of the configuration in
+the neon atom would be essentially, if not entirely, destroyed by
+\PageSep{96}
+the addition of another electron in an orbit of the same type as
+that in which the last captured electrons were bound. Just as in
+the case of the $3$rd~and $7$th electrons we may therefore expect to
+meet a new type of orbit for the 11th electron in the atom, and the
+orbits which present themselves this time are the $3_{1}$~orbits. An
+electron in such an orbit will for the greater part of the time remain
+outside the orbits of the first ten electrons. But at certain moments
+during the revolution it will penetrate not only into the region of
+the $2$-quanta orbits, but like the $2_{1}$~orbits it will penetrate to
+distances from the nucleus which are smaller than the radii of
+the $1$-quantum orbits of the two electrons first bound. This fact,
+which has a most important bearing on the stability of the atom,
+leads to a peculiar result as regards the binding of the $11$th electron.
+In the sodium atom this electron will move in a field which so far
+as the outer part of the orbit is concerned deviates only very little
+from that surrounding the nucleus in the hydrogen atom, but the
+dimensions of this part of the orbit will, nevertheless, be essentially
+different from the dimensions of the corresponding part of a $3_{1}$~orbit
+in the hydrogen atom. This arises from the fact, that even
+though the electron only enters the inner configuration of the first
+ten electrons for short intervals during its revolution, this part of
+the orbit will nevertheless exert an essential influence upon the
+determination of the principal quantum number. This is directly
+related to the fact that the motion of the electron in the first part
+of the orbit deviates only a little from the motion which each of
+the previously bound electrons in $2_{1}$~orbits executes during a complete
+revolution. The uncertainty which has prevailed in the
+determination of the quantum numbers for the stationary states
+corresponding to a spectrum like that of sodium is connected with
+this. This question has been discussed by several physicists. From
+a comparison of the spectral terms of the various alkali metals,
+Roschdestwensky has drawn the conclusion that the normal state
+does not, as we might be inclined to expect a~priori, correspond to
+a $1_{1}$~orbit as shown in \Fig{2} on \PageRef{79}, but that this state corresponds
+to a $2_{1}$~orbit. Schrödinger has arrived at a similar result
+in an attempt to account for the great difference between the
+$S$~terms and the terms in the $P$~and $D$ series of the alkali spectra.
+He assumes that the ``outer'' electron in the states corresponding
+\PageSep{97}
+to the $S$~terms---in contrast to those corresponding to the $P$~and
+$D$ terms---penetrates partly into the region of the orbits of the
+inner electrons during the course of its revolution. These investigations
+contain without doubt important hints, but in reality the
+conditions must be very different for the different alkali spectra.
+Instead of a $2_{1}$~orbit as in lithium we must thus assume for
+the spectrum of sodium not only that the first spectral term in
+the $S$~series corresponds to a $3_{1}$~orbit, but also, as a more detailed
+consideration shows, that the first term in the $P$~series corresponds
+not to a $2_{2}$~orbit as indicated in \Fig{2}, but to a $3_{2}$~orbit. If the
+numbers in this figure were correct, it would require among other
+things that the $P$~terms should be smaller than the hydrogen terms
+\Figure{3}{97}
+corresponding to the same principal quantum number. This would
+mean that the average effect of the inner electrons could be described
+as a repulsion greater than would occur if their total electrical charge
+were united in the nucleus. This, however, \Chg{can not}{cannot} be expected from
+our view of atomic structure. The fact that the last captured electron,
+at any rate for low values of~$k$, revolves partly inside the orbits of the
+previously bound electrons will on the contrary involve that the
+presence of these electrons will give rise to a virtual repulsion
+which is considerably smaller than that which would be due to
+their combined charges. Instead of the curves drawn between
+points in \Fig{2} which represent stationary states corresponding
+to the same value of the principal quantum number running from
+right to left, we obtain curves which run from left to right, as
+is indicated in \Fig{3}. The stationary states are labelled with
+\PageSep{98}
+quantum numbers corresponding to the structure I have described.
+According to the view underlying \Fig{2} the sodium spectrum
+might be described simply as a distorted hydrogen spectrum,
+whereas according to \Fig{3} there is not only distortion but also
+complete disappearance of certain terms of low quantum numbers.
+It may be stated, that this view not only appears to offer an explanation
+of the magnitude of the terms, but that the complexity
+of the terms in the $P$~and $D$ series finds a natural explanation in
+the deviation of the configuration of the ten electrons first bound
+from a purely central symmetry. This lack of symmetry has its
+origin in the configuration of the two innermost electrons and
+``transmits'' itself to the outer parts of the atomic structure, since
+the $2_{1}$~orbits penetrate partly into the region of these electrons.
+
+This view of the sodium spectrum provides at the same time an
+immediate explanation of the pronounced electropositive properties
+of sodium, since the last bound electron in the sodium atom is still
+more loosely bound than the last captured electron in the lithium
+atom. In this connection it might be mentioned that the increase
+in atomic volume with increasing atomic number in the family of
+the alkali metals finds a simple explanation in the successively
+looser binding of the valency electrons. In his work on the X-ray
+spectra Sommerfeld at an earlier period regarded this increase in
+the atomic volumes as supporting the assumption that the principal
+quantum number of the orbit of the valency electrons increases by
+unity as we pass from one metal to the next in the family. His
+later investigations on the series spectra have led him, however,
+definitely to abandon this assumption. At first sight it might also
+appear to entail a far greater increase in the atomic volume than
+that actually observed. A simple explanation of this fact is however
+afforded by realizing that the orbit of the electron will run
+partly inside the region of the inner orbit and that therefore the
+``effective'' quantum number which corresponds to the outer almost
+elliptical loop will be much smaller than the principal quantum
+number, by which the whole central orbit is described. It may
+be mentioned that Vegard in his investigations on the X-ray spectra
+has also proposed the assumption of successively increasing quantum
+numbers for the electronic orbits in the various groups of the atom,
+reckoned from the nucleus outward. He has introduced assumptions
+\PageSep{99}
+about the relations between the numbers of electrons in the various
+groups of the atom and the lengths of the periods in the periodic
+system which exhibit certain formal similarities with the results
+presented here. But Vegard's considerations do not offer points of
+departure for a further consideration of the evolution and stability
+of the groups, and consequently no basis for a detailed interpretation
+of the properties of the elements.
+
+When we consider the elements following sodium in the third
+period of the periodic system we meet in \emph{the binding of the $12$th,
+$13$th and $14$th electrons} conditions which are analogous to those
+we met in the binding of the $4$th, $5$th and $6$th electrons. In the
+elements of the third periods, however, we possess a far more
+detailed knowledge of the series spectra. Too little is known
+about the beryllium spectrum to draw conclusions about the
+binding of the fourth electron, but we may infer directly from the
+well-known arc spectrum of magnesium that the $12$th electron
+in the atom of this element is bound in a $3_{1}$~orbit. As regards
+the binding of the $13$th electron we meet in aluminium an
+absorption spectrum different in structure to that of the alkali
+metals. In fact here not the lines of the principal series but the
+lines of the sharp and diffuse series are absorption lines. Consequently
+it is the first member of the $P$~terms and not of the $S$~terms
+which corresponds to the normal state of the aluminium
+atom, and we must assume that the $13$th electron is bound in
+a $3_{2}$~orbit. This, however, would hardly seem to be a general
+property of the binding of the $13$th electron in atoms, but rather
+to arise from the special conditions for the binding of the last
+electron in an atom, where already there are two other electrons
+bound as loosely as the valency electron of aluminium. At the
+present state of the theory it seems best to assume that in the
+silicon atom the four last captured electrons will move in $3_{1}$~orbits
+forming a configuration possessing symmetrical properties
+similar to the outer configuration of the four electrons in $2_{1}$~orbits
+in carbon. Like what we assumed for the latter configuration we
+shall expect that the configuration of the $3_{1}$~orbits occurring for the
+first time in silicon possesses such a completion, that the addition
+of a further electron in a $3_{1}$~orbit to the atom of the following elements
+is impossible, and that \emph{the $15$th electron} in the elements of
+\PageSep{100}
+higher atomic number will be bound in a new type of orbit. In this
+case, however, the orbits with which we meet will not be circular,
+as in the capture of the $7$th electron, but will be rotating \Chg{excentric}{eccentric}
+orbits of the type~$3_{2}$. This is very closely related to the fact, mentioned
+above, that the non-circular orbits will correspond to a
+firmer binding than the circular orbits having the same value for
+the principal quantum number, since the electrons will at certain
+moments penetrate much farther into the interior of the atom.
+Even though a $3_{2}$~orbit will not penetrate into the innermost configuration
+of $1_{1}$~orbits, it will penetrate to distances from the nucleus
+which are considerably less than the radii of the circular $2_{}2$~orbits.
+In the case of the $16$th, $17$th and $18$th electrons the conditions are
+similar to those for the $15$th. So for argon we may expect a configuration
+in which the ten innermost electrons move in orbits of
+the same type as in the neon atom while the last eight electrons will
+form a configuration of four $3_{1}$~orbits and four $3_{2}$~orbits, whose
+symmetrical properties must be regarded as closely corresponding
+to the configuration of $2$-quanta orbits in the neon atom. At the
+same time, as this picture suggests a qualitative explanation of the
+similarity of the chemical properties of the elements in the latter
+part of the second and third periods, it also opens up the possibility
+of a natural explanation of the conspicuous difference from a
+quantitative aspect.
+
+\Section{Fourth Period. Potassium---Krypton.} In the fourth period
+we meet at first elements which resemble chemically those at the
+beginning of the two previous periods. This is also what we should
+expect. We must thus assume that \emph{the $19$th electron} is bound in
+a new type of orbit, and a closer consideration shows that this will
+be a $4_{1}$~orbit. The points which were emphasized in connection
+with the binding of the last electron in the sodium atom will be
+even more marked here on account of the larger quantum number
+by which the orbits of the inner electrons are characterized. In
+fact, in the potassium atom the $4_{1}$~orbit of the $19$th electron will,
+as far as inner loops are concerned, coincide closely with the shape
+of a $3_{1}$~orbit. On this account, therefore, the dimensions of the
+outer part of the orbit will not only deviate greatly from the
+dimensions of a $4_{1}$~orbit in the hydrogen atom, but will coincide
+\PageSep{101}
+closely with a hydrogen orbit of the type~$2_{1}$, the dimensions of
+which are about four times smaller than the $4_{1}$~hydrogen orbit.
+This result allows an immediate explanation of the main features of
+the chemical properties and the spectrum of potassium. Corresponding
+results apply to calcium, in the neutral atom of which
+there will be two valency electrons in equivalent $4_{1}$~orbits.
+
+After calcium the properties of the elements in the fourth period
+of the periodic system deviate, however, more and more from the
+corresponding elements in the previous periods, until in the family
+of the iron metals we meet elements whose properties are essentially
+different. Proceeding to still higher atomic numbers we again
+meet different conditions. Thus we find in the latter part of the
+fourth period a series of elements whose chemical properties approach
+more and more to the properties of the elements at the end
+of the preceding periods, until finally with atomic number~$36$ we
+again meet one of the inactive gases, namely krypton. This is
+exactly what we should expect. The formation and stability of the
+atoms of the elements in the first three periods require that each
+of the first $18$ electrons in the atom shall be bound in each succeeding
+element in an orbit of the same principal quantum number
+as that possessed by the particular electron, when it first appeared.
+It is readily seen that this is no longer the case for the $19$th
+electron. With increasing nuclear charge and the consequent
+decrease in the difference between the fields of force inside and
+outside the region of the orbits of the first $18$ bound electrons, the
+dimensions of those parts of a $4_{1}$~orbit which fall outside will
+approach more and more to the dimensions of a $4$-quantum orbit
+calculated on the assumption that the interaction between the
+electrons in the atom may be neglected. \emph{With increasing atomic
+number a point will therefore be reached where a $3_{3}$~orbit will correspond
+to a firmer binding of the $19$th electron than a $4_{1}$~orbit}, and
+this occurs as early as at the beginning of the fourth period. This
+cannot only be anticipated from a simple calculation but is confirmed
+in a striking way from an examination of the series spectra. While
+the spectrum of potassium indicates that the $4_{1}$~orbit corresponds
+to a binding which is more than twice as firm as in a $3_{3}$~orbit
+corresponding to the first spectral term in the $D$~series, the conditions
+are entirely different as soon as calcium is reached. We
+\PageSep{102}
+shall not consider the arc spectrum which is emitted during the
+capture of the $20$th electron but the spark spectrum which corresponds
+to the capture and binding of the $19$th electron. While the
+spark spectrum of magnesium exhibits great similarity with the
+sodium spectrum as regards the values of the spectral terms in the
+various series---apart from the fact that the constant appearing in
+formula~\Eq{(12)} is four times as large as the Rydberg constant---we
+meet in the spark spectrum of calcium the remarkable condition
+\Figure{4}{102}
+that the first term of the $D$~series is larger than the first term of
+the $P$~series and is only a little smaller than the first term of the
+$S$~series, which may be regarded as corresponding to the binding
+of the $19$th electron in the normal state of the calcium atom.
+These facts are shown in \Fig[figure]{4} which gives a survey of the
+stationary states corresponding to the arc spectra of sodium and
+potassium. As in figures \FigNum{2} and~\FigNum{3} of the sodium spectrum, we
+have disregarded the complexity of the spectral terms, and the
+numbers characterizing the stationary states are simply the quantum
+\PageSep{103}
+numbers $n$~and~$k$. For the sake of comparison the scale in which the
+energy of the different states is indicated is chosen four times as
+small for the spark spectra as for the arc spectra. Consequently
+the vertical lines indicated with various values of~$n$ correspond for
+the arc spectra to the spectral terms of hydrogen, for the spark
+spectra to the terms of the helium spectrum given by formula~\Eq{(7)}.
+Comparing the change in the relative firmness in the binding of
+the $19$th electron in a $4_{1}$~and $3_{3}$~orbit for potassium and calcium we
+see that we must be prepared already for the next element,
+scandium, to find that the $3_{3}$~orbit will correspond to a stronger
+binding of this electron than a $4_{1}$~orbit. On the other hand it
+follows from previous remarks that the binding will be much lighter
+than for the first $18$ electrons which agrees that in chemical combinations
+scandium appears electropositively with three valencies.
+
+If we proceed to the following elements, a still larger number of
+$3_{3}$~orbits will occur in the normal state of these atoms, since the
+number of such electron orbits will depend upon the firmness of
+their binding compared to the firmness with which an electron is
+bound in a $4_{1}$~orbit, in which type of orbit at least the last captured
+electron in the atom may be assumed to move. We therefore meet
+conditions which are essentially different from those which we have
+considered in connection with the previous periods, so that here
+we have to do with \emph{the successive development of one of the inner
+groups of electrons in the atom}, in this case with groups of electrons
+in $3$-quanta orbits. Only when the development of this group has
+been completed may we expect to find once more a corresponding
+change in the properties of the elements with increasing atomic
+number such as we find in the preceding periods. The properties
+of the elements in the latter part of the fourth period show
+immediately that the group, when completed, will possess $18$~electrons.
+Thus in krypton, for example, we may expect besides
+the groups of $1$,~$2$ and $3$-quanta orbits a markedly symmetrical
+configuration of $8$~electrons in $4$-quanta orbits consisting of four $4_{1}$~orbits
+and four $4_{2}$~orbits.
+
+The question now arises: In which way will the gradual formation
+of the group of electrons having $3$-quanta orbits take place?
+From analogy with the constitution of the groups of electrons with
+$2$-quanta orbits we might at first sight be inclined to suppose that
+\PageSep{104}
+the complete group of $3$-quanta orbits would consist of three subgroups
+of four electrons each in orbits of the types $3_{1}$,~$3_{2}$ and~$3_{3}$
+respectively, so that the total number of electrons would be $12$
+instead of~$18$. Further consideration shows, however, that such an
+expectation would not be justified. The stability of the configuration
+of eight electrons with $2$-quanta orbits occurring in neon must
+be ascribed not only to the symmetrical configuration of the electronic
+orbits in the two subgroups of $2_{1}$~and $2_{2}$ orbits respectively,
+but fully as much to the possibility of bringing the orbits inside these
+subgroups into harmonic relation with one another. The situation
+is different, however, for the groups of electrons with $3$-quanta
+orbits. Three subgroups of four orbits each \Chg{can not}{cannot} in this case be
+expected to come into interaction with one another in a correspondingly
+simple manner. On the contrary we must assume that
+the presence of electrons in $3_{3}$~orbits will diminish the harmony of
+the orbits within the first two $3$-quanta subgroups, at any rate
+when a point is reached where the $19$th electron is no longer, as
+was the case with scandium, bound considerably more lightly than
+the previously bound electrons in $3$-quanta orbits, but has been
+drawn so far into the atom that it revolves within essentially
+the same region of the atom where these electrons move. We
+shall now assume that this decrease in the harmony will so to
+say ``open'' the previously ``closed'' configuration of electrons
+in orbits of these types. As regards the final result, the number~$18$
+indicates that after the group is finally formed there will
+be three subgroups containing six electrons each. Even if it has
+not at present been possible to follow in detail the various
+steps in the formation of the group this result is nevertheless
+confirmed in an interesting manner by the fact that it is possible
+to arrange three configurations having six electrons each in a simple
+manner relative to one another. The configuration of the subgroups
+does not exhibit a tetrahedral symmetry like the groups of $2$-quanta
+orbits in carbon, but a symmetry which, so far as the relative
+orientation of the normals to the planes of the orbits is concerned,
+may be described as trigonal.
+
+In spite of the great difference in the properties of the elements
+of this period, compared with those of the preceding period, the
+completion of the group of $18$~electrons in $3$-quanta orbits in the
+\PageSep{105}
+fourth period may to a certain extent be said to have the same
+characteristic results as the completion of the group of $2$-quanta
+orbits in the second period. As we have seen, this determined not
+only the properties of neon as an inactive gas, but in addition the
+electronegative properties of the preceding elements and the
+electropositive properties of the elements which follow. The fact
+that there is no inactive gas possessing an outer group of $18$~electrons
+is very easily accounted for by the much larger dimensions
+which a $3_{3}$~orbit has in comparison with a $2_{2}$~orbit revolving in the
+same field of force. On this account a complete $3$-quanta group
+\Chg{can not}{cannot} occur as the outermost group in a neutral atom, but only
+in positively charged ions. The characteristic decrease in valency
+which we meet in copper, shown by the appearance of the singly
+charged cuprous ions, indicates the same tendency towards the
+completion of a symmetrical configuration of electrons that we
+found in the marked electronegative character of an element like
+fluorine. Direct evidence that a complete group of $3$-quanta orbits
+is present in the cuprous ion is given by the spectrum of copper
+which, in contrast to the extremely complicated spectra of the
+preceding elements resulting from the unsymmetrical character of
+the inner system, possesses a simple structure very much like that
+of the sodium spectrum. This may no doubt be ascribed to a
+simple symmetrical structure present in the cuprous ion similar to
+that in the sodium ion, although the great difference in the constitution
+of the outer group of electrons in these ions is shown
+both by the considerable difference in the values of the spectral
+terms and in the separation of the doublets in the $P$~terms of the
+two spectra. The occurrence of the cupric compounds shows, however,
+that the firmness of binding in the group of $3$-quanta orbits
+in the copper atom is not as great as the firmness with which the
+electrons are bound in the group of $2$-quanta orbits in the sodium
+atom. Zinc, which is always divalent, is the first element in which
+the groups of the electrons are so firmly bound that they \Chg{can not}{cannot}
+be removed by ordinary chemical processes.
+
+The picture I have given of the formation and structure of the
+atoms of the elements in the fourth period gives an explanation of
+the chemical and spectral properties. In addition it is supported
+by evidence of a different nature to that which we have hitherto
+\PageSep{106}
+used. It is a familiar fact, that the elements in the fourth period
+differ markedly from the elements in the preceding periods
+partly in their \emph{magnetic properties} and partly in the \emph{characteristic
+colours} of their compounds. Paramagnetism and colours do occur
+in elements belonging to the foregoing periods, but not in simple
+compounds where the atoms considered enter as ions. Many
+elements of the fourth period, on the contrary, exhibit paramagnetic
+properties and characteristic colours even in dissociated
+aqueous solutions. The importance of this has been emphasized
+by Ladenburg in his attempt to explain the properties of the
+elements in the long periods of the periodic system (see \PageRef{73}).
+Langmuir in order to account for the difference between the fourth
+period and the preceding periods simply assumed that the atom,
+in addition to the layers of cells containing $8$~electrons each, possesses
+an outer layer of cells with room for $18$~electrons which is completely
+filled for the first time in the case of krypton. Ladenburg,
+on the other hand, assumes that for some reason or other an
+intermediate layer is developed between the inner electronic
+configuration in the atom appearing already in argon, and the
+external group of valency electrons. This layer commences with
+scandium and is completed exactly at the end of the family of iron
+metals. In support of this assumption Ladenburg not only mentions
+the chemical properties of the elements in the fourth period, but
+also refers to the paramagnetism and colours which occur exactly
+in the elements, where this intermediate layer should be in
+development. It is seen that Ladenburg's ideas exhibit certain
+formal similarities with the interpretation I have given above of
+the appearance of the fourth period, and it is interesting to note that
+our view, based on a direct investigation of the conditions for the
+formation of the atoms, enables us to understand the relation
+emphasized by Ladenburg.
+
+Our ordinary electrodynamic conceptions are probably insufficient
+to form a basis for an explanation of atomic magnetism. This is
+hardly to be wondered at when we remember that they have not
+proved adequate to account for the phenomena of radiation which
+are connected with the intimate interaction between the electric
+and magnetic forces arising from the motion of the electrons. In
+whatever way these difficulties may be solved it seems simplest to
+\PageSep{107}
+assume that the occurrence of magnetism, such as we meet in the
+elements of the fourth period, results from a lack of symmetry in
+the internal structure of the atom, thus preventing the magnetic
+forces arising from the motion of the electrons from forming a
+system of closed lines of force running wholly within the atom.
+While it has been assumed that the ions of the elements in the
+previous periods, whether positively or negatively charged, contain
+configurations of marked symmetrical character, we must, however,
+be prepared to encounter a definite lack of symmetry in the
+electronic configurations in ions of those elements within the fourth
+period which contain a group of electrons in $3$-quanta orbits in the
+transition stage between symmetrical configurations of $8$~and $18$
+electrons respectively. As pointed out by Kossel, the experimental
+results exhibit an extreme simplicity, the magnetic moment of the
+ions depending only on the number of electrons in the ion. Ferric
+ions, for example, exhibit the same atomic magnetism as manganous
+ions, while manganic ions exhibit the same atomic magnetism as
+chromous ions. It is in beautiful agreement with what we have
+assumed about the structure of the atoms of copper and zinc, that
+the magnetism disappears with those ions containing $28$~electrons
+which, as I stated, must be assumed to contain a complete group
+of $3$-quanta orbits. On the whole a consideration of the magnetic
+properties of the elements within the fourth period gives us a vivid
+impression of how a wound in the otherwise symmetrical inner
+structure is first developed and then healed as we pass from element
+to element. It is to be hoped that a further investigation of the
+magnetic properties will give us a clue to the way in which the
+group of electrons in $3$-quanta orbits is developed step by step.
+
+Also the colours of the ions directly support our view of atomic
+structure. According to the postulates of the quantum theory
+absorption as well as emission of radiation is regarded as taking
+place during transitions between stationary states. The occurrence
+of colours, that is to say the absorption of light in the visible region
+of the spectrum, is evidence of transitions involving energy changes
+of the same order of magnitude as those giving the usual optical
+spectra of the elements. In contrast to the ions of the elements of
+the preceding periods where all the electrons are assumed to be very
+firmly bound, the occurrence of such processes in the fourth period
+\PageSep{108}
+is exactly what we should expect. For the development and completion
+of the electronic groups with $3$-quanta orbits will proceed,
+so to say, in competition with the binding of electrons in orbits of
+higher quanta, since the binding of electrons in $3$-quanta orbits
+occurs when the electrons in these orbits are bound more firmly
+than electrons in $4_{1}$~orbits. The development of the group will
+therefore proceed to the point where we may say there is equilibrium
+between the two kinds of orbits. This condition may be
+assumed to be intimately connected not only with the colour of the
+ions, but also with the tendency of the elements to form ions with
+different valencies. This is in contrast to the elements of the first
+periods where the charge of the ions in aqueous solutions is always
+the same for one and the same element.
+
+\Section{Fifth Period. Rubidium---Xenon.} The structure of the atoms
+in the remaining periods may be followed up in complete analogy
+with what has already been said. Thus we shall assume that the
+$37$th and $38$th electrons in the elements of the fifth period are
+bound in $5_{1}$~orbits. This is supported by the measurements of the
+arc spectrum of rubidium and the spark spectrum of strontium.
+The latter spectrum indicates at the same time that $4_{3}$~orbits will
+soon appear, and therefore in this period, which like the $4$th
+contains $18$~elements, we must assume that we are witnessing a
+\emph{further stage in the development of the electronic group of $4$-quanta
+orbits}. The first stage in the formation of this group may be said
+to have been attained in krypton with the appearance of a symmetrical
+configuration of eight electrons consisting of two subgroups
+each of four electrons in $4_{1}$~and $4_{2}$~orbits. A second preliminary
+completion must be regarded as having been reached with the
+appearance of a symmetrical configuration of $18$~electrons in the
+case of silver, consisting of three subgroups with six electrons each
+in orbits of the types $4_{1}$,~$4_{2}$ and~$4_{3}$. Everything that has been said
+about the successive formation of the group of electrons with $3$-quanta
+orbits applies unchanged to this stage in the transformation
+of the group with $4$-quanta orbits. For in no case have we made
+use of the absolute values of the quantum numbers nor of assumptions
+concerning the form of the orbits but only of the number of
+possible types of orbits which might come into consideration. At
+\PageSep{109}
+the same time it may be of interest to mention that the properties
+of these elements compared with those of the foregoing period
+nevertheless show a difference corresponding exactly to what would
+be expected from the difference in the types of orbits. For instance,
+the divergencies from the characteristic valency conditions of the
+elements in the second and third periods appear later in the fifth
+period than for elements in the fourth period. While an element
+like titanium in the fourth period already shows a marked tendency
+to occur with various valencies, on the other hand an element like
+zirconium is still quadri-valent like carbon in the second period
+and silicon in the third. A simple investigation of the kinematic
+properties of the orbits of the electrons shows in fact that an
+electron in an \Chg{excentric}{eccentric} $4_{3}$~orbit of an element in the fifth
+period will be considerably more loosely bound than an electron in
+a circular $3_{3}$~orbit of the corresponding element in the fourth
+period, while electrons which are bound in \Chg{excentric}{eccentric} orbits of the
+types $5_{1}$~and $4_{1}$ respectively will correspond to a binding of about
+the same firmness.
+
+At the end of the fifth period we may assume that xenon, the
+atomic number of which is~$54$, has a structure which in addition to
+the two $1$-quantum, eight $2$-quanta, eighteen $3$-quanta and eighteen
+$4$-quanta orbits already mentioned contains a symmetrical
+configuration of eight electrons in $5$-quanta orbits consisting of two
+subgroups with four electrons each in $5_{1}$~and $5_{2}$ orbits respectively.
+
+\Section{Sixth Period. Caesium---Niton.} If we now consider the atoms
+of elements of still higher atomic number, we must first of all
+assume that the $55$th and $56$th electrons in the atoms of caesium
+and barium are bound in $6_{1}$~orbits. This is confirmed by the spectra
+of these elements. It is clear, however, that we must be prepared
+shortly to meet entirely new conditions. With increasing nuclear
+charge we shall have to expect not only that an electron in a $5_{3}$~orbit
+will be bound more firmly than in a $6_{1}$~orbit, but we must also
+expect that a moment will arrive when during the formation of the
+atom a $4_{4}$~orbit will represent a firmer binding of the electron than
+an orbit of $5$~or $6$-quanta, in much the same way as in the elements
+of the fourth period a new stage in the development of the $3$-quanta
+group was started when a point was reached where for the first
+\PageSep{110}
+time the $19$th electron was bound in a $3_{3}$~orbit instead of in a $4_{1}$~orbit.
+We shall thus expect in the sixth period to meet with a new
+stage in the development of the group with $4$-quanta orbits. Once
+this point has been reached we must be prepared to find with increasing
+atomic number a number of elements following one another,
+which as in the family of the iron metals have very nearly the same
+properties. The similarity will, however, be still more pronounced,
+since in this case we are concerned with the successive transformation
+of a configuration of electrons which lies deeper in the interior
+of the atom. You will have already guessed that what I have in view
+is a simple explanation of the occurrence of the \emph{family of rare earths}
+at the beginning of the sixth period. As in the case of the transformation
+and completion of the group of $3$-quanta orbits in the fourth
+period and the partial completion of groups of $4$-quanta orbits in
+the fifth period, we may immediately deduce from the length of the
+sixth period the number of electrons, namely~$32$, which are finally
+contained in the $4$-quanta group of orbits. Analogous to what
+applied to the group of $3$-quanta orbits it is probable that, when
+the group is completed, it will contain eight electrons in each of the
+four subgroups. Even though it has not yet been possible to follow
+the development of the group step by step, we can even here give
+some theoretical evidence in favour of the occurrence of a symmetrical
+configuration of exactly this number of electrons. I shall
+simply mention that it is not possible without coincidence of the
+planes of the orbits to arrive at an interaction between four subgroups
+of six electrons each in a configuration of simple trigonal
+symmetry, which is equally simple as that shown by three subgroups.
+The difficulties which we meet make it probable that a harmonic
+interaction can be attained precisely by four groups each containing
+eight electrons the orbital configurations of which exhibit axial
+symmetry.
+
+Just as in the case of the family of the iron metals in the fourth
+period, the proposed explanation of the occurrence of the family of
+rare earths in the sixth period is supported in an interesting
+manner by an investigation of the magnetic properties of these
+elements. In spite of the great chemical similarity the members
+of this family exhibit very different magnetic properties, so that
+while some of them exhibit but very little magnetism others exhibit
+\PageSep{111}
+a greater magnetic moment per atom than any other element which
+has been investigated. It is also possible to give a simple interpretation
+of the peculiar colours exhibited by the compounds of these
+elements in much the same way as in the case of the family of iron
+metals in the fourth period. The idea that the appearance of the
+group of the rare earths is connected with the development of inner
+groups in the atom is not in itself new and has for instance been
+considered by Vegard in connection with his work on X-ray spectra.
+The new feature of the present considerations lies, however, in the
+emphasis laid on the peculiar way in which the relative strength of
+the binding for two orbits of the same principal quantum number
+but of different shapes varies with the nuclear charge and with the
+number of electrons previously bound. Due to this fact the presence
+of a group like that of the rare earths in the sixth period may be
+considered as a direct consequence of the theory and might actually
+have been predicted on a quantum theory, adapted to the explanation
+of the properties of the elements within the preceding periods
+in the way I have shown.
+
+Besides \emph{the final development of the group of $4$-quanta orbits} we
+observe in the sixth period in the family of the platinum metals \emph{the
+second stage in the development of the group of $5$-quanta orbits}.
+Also in the radioactive, chemically inactive gas niton, which completes
+this period, we observe the first preliminary step in the
+development of a group of electrons with $6$-quanta orbits. In the
+atom of this element, in addition to the groups of electrons of two
+$1$-quantum, eight $2$-quanta, eighteen $3$-quanta, thirty-two $4$-quanta
+and eighteen $5$-quanta orbits respectively, there is also an outer
+symmetrical configuration of eight electrons in $6$-quanta orbits,
+which we shall assume to consist of two subgroups with four electrons
+each in $6_{1}$~and $6_{2}$ orbits respectively.
+
+\Section{Seventh Period.} In the seventh and last period of the periodic
+system we may expect the appearance of $7$-quanta orbits in the
+normal state of the atom. Thus in the neutral atom of radium in
+addition to the electronic structure of niton there will be two
+electrons in $7_{1}$~orbits which will penetrate during their revolution
+not only into the region of the orbits of electrons possessing lower
+values for the principal quantum number, but even to distances
+\PageSep{112}
+from the nucleus which are less than the radii of the orbits of the
+innermost $1$-quantum orbits. The properties of the elements in the
+seventh period are very similar to the properties of the elements in the
+fifth period. Thus, in contrast to the conditions in the sixth period,
+there are no elements whose properties resemble one another like
+those of the rare earths. In exact analogy with what has already
+been said about the relations between the properties of the elements
+in the fourth and fifth periods this may be very simply explained by
+the fact that an \Chg{excentric}{eccentric} $5_{4}$~orbit will correspond to a considerably
+looser binding of an electron in the atom of an element of the
+seventh period than the binding of an electron in a circular $4_{4}$~orbit
+in the corresponding element of the sixth period, while there will be
+a much smaller difference in the firmness of the binding of these
+electrons in orbits of the types $7_{1}$~and $6_{1}$ respectively.
+
+It is well known that the seventh period is not complete, for no atom
+has been found having an atomic number greater than~$92$. This is
+probably connected with the fact that the last elements in the
+system are radioactive and that nuclei of atoms with a total charge
+greater than~$92$ will not be sufficiently stable to exist under conditions
+where the elements can be observed. It is tempting to
+sketch a picture of the atoms formed by the capture and binding
+of electrons around nuclei having higher charges, and thus to
+obtain some idea of the properties which the corresponding hypothetical
+elements might be expected to exhibit. I shall not develop
+this matter further, however, since the general results we should
+get will be evident to you from the views I have developed to
+explain the properties of the elements actually observed. A survey
+of these results is given in the following table, which gives a symbolical
+representation of the atomic structure of the inactive gases
+which complete the first six periods in the periodic system. In
+order to emphasize the progressive change the table includes the
+probable arrangement of electrons in the next atom which would
+possess properties like the inactive gases.
+
+The view of atomic constitution underlying this table, which
+involves configurations of electrons moving with large velocities
+between each other, so that the electrons in the ``outer'' groups
+penetrate into the region of the orbits of the electrons of the ``inner''
+groups, is of course completely different from such statical models
+\PageSep{113}
+of the atom as are proposed by Langmuir. But quite apart from this
+it will be seen that the arrangement of the electronic groups in
+the atom, to which we have been lead by tracing the way in which
+each single electron has been bound, is essentially different from
+the arrangement of the groups in Langmuir's theory. In order to
+explain the properties of the elements of the sixth period Langmuir
+assumes for instance that, in addition to the inner layers of cells
+containing $2$,~$8$, $8$, $18$ and $18$ electrons respectively, which are
+employed to account for the properties of the elements in the
+earlier periods, the atom also possesses a layer of cells with room
+for $32$~electrons which is just completed in the case of niton.
+
+\Figure{}{113}
+
+In this connection it may be of interest to mention a recent
+paper by Bury, to which my attention was first drawn after the
+deliverance of this address, and which contains an interesting
+survey of the chemical properties of the elements based on similar
+conceptions of atomic structure as those applied by Lewis and
+Langmuir. From purely chemical considerations Bury arrives at
+conclusions which as regards the arrangement and completion of
+the groups in the main coincide with those of the present theory,
+the outlines of which were given in my letters to Nature mentioned
+in the introduction.
+
+\Section{Survey of the periodic table.} The results given in this address
+are also illustrated by means of the representation of the periodic
+system given in \Fig{1}. In this figure the frames are meant to
+indicate such elements in which one of the ``inner'' groups is
+in a stage of development. Thus there will be found in the
+\PageSep{114}
+fourth and fifth periods a single frame indicating the final completion
+of the electronic group with $3$-quanta orbits, and the
+last stage but one in the development of the group with $4$-quanta
+orbits respectively. In the sixth period it has been necessary to
+introduce two frames, of which the inner one indicates the last
+stage of the evolution of the group with $4$-quanta orbits, giving rise
+to the rare earths. This occurs at a place in the periodic system
+where the third stage in the development of an electronic group
+with $5$-quanta orbits, indicated by the outer frame, has already
+begun. In this connection it will be seen that the inner frame
+encloses a smaller number of elements than is usually attributed
+to the family of the rare earths. At the end of this group an
+uncertainty exists, due to the fact that no element of atomic
+number~$72$ is known with certainty. However, as indicated in
+\Fig{1}, we must conclude from the theory that the group with
+$4$-quanta orbits is finally completed in lutetium~($71$). This element
+therefore ought to be the last in the sequence of consecutive
+elements with similar properties in the first half of the sixth period,
+and at the place~$72$ an element must be expected which in its
+chemical and physical properties is homologous with zirconium and
+thorium. This, which is already indited on Julius Thomsen's old
+table, has also been pointed out by Bury. [Quite recently Dauvillier
+has in an investigation of the X-ray spectrum excited in preparations
+containing rare earths, observed certain faint lines which he ascribes
+to an element of atomic number~$72$. This element is identified by
+him as the element celtium, belonging to the family of rare earths,
+the existence of which had previously been suspected by Urbain.
+Quite apart from the difficulties which this result, if correct, might
+entail for atomic theories, it would, since the rare earths according
+to chemical view possess three valencies, imply a rise in positive
+valency of two units when passing from the element~$72$ to the
+next element~$73$, tantalum. This would mean an exception from
+the otherwise general rule, that the valency never increases by
+more than one unit when passing from one element to the next in
+the periodic table\Add{.}] In the case of the incomplete seventh period
+the full drawn frame indicates the third stage in the development
+of the electronic group with $6$-quanta orbits, which must begin in
+actinium. The dotted frame indicates the last stage but one in
+\PageSep{115}
+the development of the group with $5$-quanta orbits, which hitherto
+has not been observed, but which ought to begin shortly after
+uranium, if it has not already begun in this element.
+
+With reference to the homology of the elements the exceptional
+position of the elements enclosed by frames in \Fig{1} is further
+emphasized by taking care that, in spite of the large similarity
+many elements exhibit, no connecting lines are drawn between
+two elements which occupy different positions in the system with
+respect to framing. In fact, the large chemical similarity between,
+for instance, aluminium and scandium, both of which are trivalent
+and pronounced electropositive elements, is directly or indirectly
+emphasized in the current representations of the periodic table.
+While this procedure is justified by the analogous structure of the
+trivalent ions of these elements, our more detailed ideas of atomic
+structure suggest, however, marked differences in the physical
+properties of aluminium and scandium, originating in the essentially
+different character of the way in which the last three electrons
+in the neutral atom are bound. This fact gives probably a direct
+explanation of the marked difference existing between the spectra
+of aluminium and scandium. Even if the spectrum of scandium is
+not yet sufficiently cleared up, this difference seems to be of a much
+more fundamental character than for instance the difference between
+the arc spectra of sodium and copper, which apart from the large
+difference in the absolute values of the spectral terms possess a
+completely analogous structure, as previously mentioned in this
+essay. On the whole we must expect that the spectra of elements
+in the later periods lying inside a frame will show new features
+compared with the spectra of the elements in the first three periods.
+This expectation seems supported by recent work on the spectrum
+of manganese by Catalan, which appeared just before the printing
+of this essay.
+
+Before I leave the interpretation of the chemical properties by
+means of this atomic model I should like to remind you once again
+of the fundamental principles which we have used. The whole
+theory has evolved from an investigation of the way in which
+electrons can be captured by an atom. The formation of an atom
+was held to consist in the successive binding of electrons, this
+binding resulting in radiation according to the quantum theory.
+\PageSep{116}
+According to the fundamental postulates of the theory this binding
+takes place in stages by transitions between stationary states
+accompanied by emission of radiation. For the problem of the
+stability of the atom the essential problem is at what stage such a
+process comes to an end. As regards this point the postulates give
+no direct information, but here the correspondence principle is
+brought in. Even though it has been possible to penetrate considerably
+further at many points than the time has permitted me
+to indicate to you, still it has not yet been possible to follow in
+detail all stages in the formation of the atoms. We cannot say, for
+instance, that the above table of the atomic constitution of the
+inert gases may in every detail be considered as the unambiguous
+result of applying the correspondence principle. On the other hand
+it appears that our considerations already place the empirical data
+in a light which scarcely permits of an essentially different interpretation
+of the properties of the elements based upon the postulates of
+the quantum theory. This applies not only to the series spectra
+and the close relationship of these to the chemical properties of the
+elements, but also to the X-ray spectra, the consideration of which
+leads us into an investigation of interatomic processes of an entirely
+different character. As we have already mentioned, it is necessary
+to assume that the emission of the latter spectra is connected with
+processes which may be described as a reorganization of the completely
+formed atom after a disturbance produced in the interior
+of the atom by the action of external forces.
+
+
+\Chapter{IV.}{Reorganization of Atoms and X-Ray Spectra}
+
+As in the case of the series spectra it has also been possible to represent
+the frequency of each line in the X-ray spectrum of an element
+as the difference of two of a set of spectral terms. We shall therefore
+assume that each X-ray line is due to a transition between
+two stationary states of the atom. The values of the atomic energy
+corresponding to these states are frequently referred to as the
+``energy levels'' of the X-ray spectra. The great difference between
+the origin of the X-ray and the series spectra is clearly seen, however,
+in the difference of the laws applying to the absorption of
+radiation in the X-ray and the optical regions of the spectra. The
+absorption by non-excited atoms in the latter case is connected
+\PageSep{117}
+with those lines in the series spectrum which correspond to combinations
+of the various spectral terms with the largest of these
+terms. As has been shown, especially by the investigations of
+Wagner and de~Broglie, the absorption in the X-ray region, on
+the other hand, is connected not with the X-ray lines but with
+certain spectral regions commencing at the so-called ``absorption
+edges.'' The frequencies of these edges agree very closely with the
+spectral terms used to account for the X-ray lines. We shall now
+see how the conception of atomic structure developed in the preceding
+pages offers a simple interpretation of these facts. Let us
+consider the following question: What changes in the state of the
+atom can be produced by the absorption of radiation, and which
+processes of emission can be initiated by such changes?
+
+\Section{Absorption and emission of X-rays and correspondence
+principle.} The possibility of producing a change at all in the
+motion of an electron in the interior of an atom by means of radiation
+must in the first place be regarded as intimately connected
+with the character of the interaction between the electrons within
+the separate groups. In contrast to the forms of motion where at
+every moment the position of the electrons exhibits polygonal or
+polyhedral symmetry, the conception of this interaction evolved from
+a consideration of the possible formation of atoms by successive
+binding of electrons has such a character that the harmonic components
+in the motion of an electron are in general represented in
+the resulting electric moment of the atom. As a result of this it
+will be possible to release a single electron from the interaction
+with the other electrons in the same group by a process which
+possesses the necessary analogy with an absorption process on
+the ordinary electrodynamic view claimed by the correspondence
+principle. The points of view on which we based the interpretation
+of the development and completion of the groups during the
+formation of an atom imply, on the other hand, that just as no
+additional electron can be taken up into a previously completed
+group in the atom by a change involving emission of radiation,
+similarly it will not be possible for a new electron to be added
+to such a group, when the state of the atom is changed by
+absorption of radiation. This means that an electron which belongs
+\PageSep{118}
+to one of the inner groups of the atom, as a consequence of an
+absorption process---besides the case where it leaves the atom
+completely---can only go over either to an incompleted group, or
+to an orbit where the electron during the greater part of its revolution
+moves at a distance from the nucleus large compared to the
+distance of the other electrons. On account of the peculiar conditions
+of stability which control the occurrence of incomplete groups in
+the interior of the atom, the energy which is necessary to bring
+about a transition to such a group will in general differ very little
+from that required to remove the particular electron completely
+from the atom. We must therefore assume that the energy levels
+corresponding to the absorption edges indicate to a first approximation
+the amount of work that is required to remove an electron
+in one of the inner groups completely from the atom. The
+correspondence principle also provides a basis for understanding
+the experimental evidence about the appearance of the emission
+lines of the X-ray spectra due to transitions between the stationary
+states corresponding to these energy levels. Thus the nature of the
+interaction between the electrons in the groups of the atom implies
+that each electron in the atom is so to say prepared, independently
+of the other electrons in the same group, to seize any opportunity
+which is offered to become more firmly bound by being taken up
+into a group of electrons with orbits corresponding to smaller values
+of the principal quantum number. It is evident, however, that on
+the basis of our views of atomic structure, such an opportunity is
+always at hand as soon as an electron has been removed from one
+of these groups.
+
+At the same time that our view of the atom leads to a natural
+conception of the phenomena of emission and absorption of X-rays,
+agreeing closely with that by which Kossel has attempted to give
+a formal explanation of the experimental observations, it also suggests
+a simple explanation of those quantitative relations holding for the
+frequencies of the lines which have been discovered by Moseley and
+Sommerfeld. These researches brought to light a remarkable and
+far-reaching similarity between the Röntgen spectrum of a given
+element and the spectrum which would be expected to appear upon
+the binding of a single electron by the nucleus. This similarity we
+immediately understand if we recall that in the normal state of the
+\PageSep{119}
+atom there are electrons moving in orbits which, with certain
+limitations, correspond to all stages of such a binding process and
+that, when an electron is removed from its original place in the
+atom, processes may be started within the atom which will correspond
+to all transitions between these stages permitted by the
+correspondence principle. This brings us at once out of those
+difficulties which apparently arise, when one attempts to account
+for the origin of the X-ray spectra by means of an atomic structure,
+suited to explain the periodic system. This difficulty has been felt
+to such an extent that it has led Sommerfeld for example in his
+recent work to assume that the configurations of the electrons in
+the various atoms of one and the same element may be different
+even under usual conditions. Since, in contrast to our ideas, he
+supposed all electrons in the principal groups of the atom to move
+in equivalent orbits, he is compelled to assume that these groups
+are different in the different atoms, corresponding to different
+possible types of orbital shapes. Such an assumption, however, seems
+inconsistent with an interpretation of the definite character of the
+physical and chemical properties of the elements, and stands in marked
+contradiction with the points of view about the stability of the atoms
+which form the basis of the view of atomic structure here proposed.
+
+\Section{X-ray spectra and atomic structure.} In this connection it is
+of interest to emphasize that the group distribution of the electrons
+in the atom, on which we have based both the explanation of the
+periodic system and the classification of the lines in the X-ray
+spectra, shows itself in an entirely different manner in these two
+phenomena. While the characteristic change of the chemical
+properties with atomic number is due to the gradual development
+and completion of the groups of the loosest bound electrons, the
+characteristic absence of almost every trace of a periodic change in
+the X-ray spectra is due to two causes. Firstly the electronic
+configuration of the completed groups is repeated unchanged for
+increasing atomic number, and secondly the gradual way in which
+the incompleted groups are developed implies that a type of orbit,
+from the moment when it for the first time appears in the normal
+state of the neutral atom, always will occur in this state and will
+correspond to a steadily increasing firmness of binding. The development
+\PageSep{120}
+of the groups in the atom with increasing atomic number,
+which governs the chemical properties of the elements shows itself
+in the X-ray spectra mainly in the appearance of new lines. Swinne
+has already referred to a connection of this kind between the periodic
+system and the X-ray spectra in connection with Kossel's theory.
+We can only expect a closer connection between the X-ray phenomena
+and the chemical properties of the elements, when the conditions
+on the surface of the atom are concerned. In agreement
+with what has been brought to light by investigations on absorption
+of X-rays in elements of lower atomic number, such as have
+been performed in recent years in the physical laboratory at Lund,
+we understand immediately that the position and eventual structure
+of the absorption edges will to a certain degree depend upon
+the physical and chemical conditions under which the element
+investigated exists, while such a dependence does not appear in
+the characteristic emission lines.
+
+If we attempt to obtain a more detailed explanation of the
+experimental observations, we meet the question of the influence
+of the presence of the other electrons in the atom upon the firmness
+of the binding of an electron in a given type of orbit. This influence
+will, as we at once see, be least for the inner parts of the atom,
+where for each electron the attraction of the nucleus is large in
+proportion to the repulsion of the other electrons. It should also
+be recalled, that while the relative influence of the presence of the
+other electrons upon the firmness of the binding will decrease with
+increasing charge of the nucleus, the effect of the variation in the
+mass of the electron with the velocity upon the firmness of the
+binding will increase strongly. This may be seen from Sommerfeld's
+formula~\Eq{(11)}. While we obtain a fairly good agreement for the
+levels corresponding to the removal of one of the innermost electrons
+in the atom by using the simple formula~\Eq{(11)}, it is, however, already
+necessary to take the influence of the other electrons into consideration
+in making an approximate calculation of the levels corresponding
+to a removal of an electron from one of the outer groups in the
+atom. Just this circumstance offers us, however, a possibility of
+obtaining information about the configurations of the electrons in
+the interior of the atoms from the X-ray spectra. Numerous
+investigations have been directed at this question both by
+\PageSep{121}
+Sommerfeld and his pupils and by Debye, Vegard and others. It
+may also be remarked that de~Broglie and Dauvillier in a recent
+paper have thought it possible to find support in the experimental
+material for certain assumptions about the numbers of electrons in
+the groups of the atom to which Dauvillier had been led by considerations
+about the periodic system similar to those proposed by
+Langmuir and Ladenburg. In calculations made in connection with
+these investigations it is assumed that the electrons in the various
+groups move in separate concentric regions of the atom, so that
+the effect of the presence of the electrons in inner groups upon the
+motion of the electrons in outer groups as a first approximation
+may be expected to consist in a simple screening of the nucleus.
+On our view, however, the conditions are essentially different, since
+for the calculation of the firmness of the binding of the electrons
+it is necessary to take into consideration that the electrons in the
+more lightly bound groups in general during a certain fraction of
+their revolution will penetrate into the region of the orbits of
+electrons in the more firmly bound groups. On account of this
+fact, many examples of which we saw in the series spectra, we \Chg{can not}{cannot}
+expect to give an account of the firmness of the binding of the
+separate electrons, simply by means of a ``screening correction''
+consisting in the subtraction of a constant quantity from the value
+for~$N$ in such formulae as \Eq{(5)} and~\Eq{(11)}. Furthermore in the calculation
+of the work corresponding to the energy levels we must take
+account not only of the interaction between, the electrons in the
+normal state of the atom, but also of the changes in the configuration
+and interaction of the remaining electrons, which establish
+themselves automatically without emission of radiation during the
+removal of the electron. Even though such calculations have not
+yet been made very accurately, a preliminary investigation has
+already shown that it is possible approximately to account for the
+experimental results.
+
+\Section{Classification of X-ray spectra.} Independently of a definite
+view of atomic structure it has been possible by means of a formal
+application of Kossel's and Sommerfeld's theories to disentangle
+the large amount of experimental material on X-ray spectra. This
+material is drawn mainly from the accurate measurements of
+\PageSep{122}
+Siegbahn and his collaborators. From this disentanglement of the
+experimental observations, in which besides Sommerfeld and his
+students especially Smekal and Coster have taken part, we have
+obtained a nearly complete classification of the energy levels corresponding
+to the X-ray spectra. These levels are formally referred
+to types of orbits characterized by two quantum numbers $n$ and~$k$,
+and certain definite rules for the possibilities of combination
+between the various levels have also been found. In this way a
+number of results of great interest for the further elucidation of
+the origin of the X-ray spectra have been attained. First it has
+not only been possible to find levels, which within certain limits
+correspond to all possible pairs of numbers for $n$ and~$k$, but it has
+been found that in general to each such pair more than one level
+must be assigned. This result, which at first may appear very
+surprising, upon further consideration can be given a simple
+interpretation. We must remember that the levels depend not
+only upon the constitution of the atom in the normal state, but
+also upon the configurations which appear after the removal
+of one of the inner electrons and which in contrast to the normal
+state do not possess a uniquely completed character. If we thus
+consider a process in which one of the electrons in a group
+(subgroup) is removed we must be prepared to find that after the
+process the orbits of the remaining electrons in this group may be
+orientated in more than one way in relation to one another, and
+still fulfil the conditions required of the stationary states by the
+quantum theory. Such a view of the ``complexity'' of the levels, as
+further consideration shows, just accounts for the manner in which
+the energy difference of the two levels varies with the atomic
+number. Without attempting to develop a more detailed picture
+of atomic structure, Smekal has already discussed the possibility
+of accounting for the multiplicity of levels. Besides referring to
+the possibility that the separate electrons in the principal groups
+do not move in equivalent orbits, Smekal suggests the introduction
+of three quantum numbers for the description of the various groups,
+but does not further indicate to what extent these quantum
+numbers shall be regarded as characterizing a complexity in the
+structure of the groups in the normal state itself or on the
+contrary characterizing the incompleted groups which appear
+when an electron is removed.
+\PageSep{123}
+
+It will be seen that the complexity of the X-ray levels exhibits a
+close analogy with the explanation of the complexity of the terms
+of the series spectra. There exists, however, this difference between
+the complex structure of the X-ray spectra and the complex
+structure of the lines in the series spectra, that in the X-ray
+spectra there occur not only combinations between spectral terms,
+for which $k$~varies by unity, but also between terms corresponding
+to the same value of~$k$. This may be assumed to be
+due to the fact, that in the X-ray spectra in contrast to the series
+\Figure{5}{123}
+spectra we have to do with transitions between stationary states
+where, both before and after the transition, the electron concerned
+takes part in an intimate interaction with other electrons in orbits
+with the same principal quantum number. Even though this
+interaction may be assumed to be of such a nature that the
+harmonic components which would appear in the motion of an
+electron in the absence of the others will in general also appear
+in the resulting moment of the atom, we must expect that the
+interaction between the electrons will give rise to the appearance
+in this moment of new types of harmonic components.
+\PageSep{124}
+
+It may be of interest to insert here a few words about a new
+paper of Coster which appeared after this address was given,
+and in which he has succeeded in obtaining an extended and
+detailed connection between the X-ray spectra and the ideas
+of atomic structure given in this essay. The classification mentioned
+above was based on measurements of the spectra of the
+heaviest elements, and the results in their complete form, which
+were principally due to independent work of Coster and Wentzel,
+may be represented by the diagram in \Fig{5}, which refers to
+elements in the neighbourhood of niton. The vertical arrows
+\Figure{6}{124}
+represent the observed lines arising from combinations between
+the different energy levels which are represented by horizontal lines.
+In each group the levels are arranged in the same succession as
+their energy values, but their distances do not give a quantitative
+picture of the actual energy-differences, since this would require a
+much larger figure. The numbers~$n_{k}$ attached to the different levels
+indicate the type of the corresponding orbit. The letters $a$ and~$b$
+refer to the rules of combination which I mentioned. According
+to these rules the possibility of combination is limited (1)~by the
+exclusion of combinations, for which $k$~changes by more than one
+unit, (2)~by the condition that only combinations between an $a$-
+and a $b$-level can take place. The latter rule was given in this
+\PageSep{125}
+form by Coster; Wentzel formulated it in a somewhat different
+way by the formal introduction of a third quantum number. In
+his new paper Coster has established a similar classification for the
+lighter elements. For the elements in the neighbourhood of xenon
+and krypton he has obtained results illustrated by the diagrams
+given in \Fig{6}. Just as in \Fig{5} the levels correspond exactly to
+those types of orbits which, as seen from the table on \PageRef[page]{113},
+according to the theory will be present in the atoms of these elements.
+In xenon several of the levels present in niton have disappeared,
+and in krypton still more levels have fallen away. Coster
+has also investigated in which elements these particular levels
+appear for the last time, when passing from higher to lower atomic
+number. His results concerning this point confirm in detail the
+predictions of the theory. Further he proves that the change in
+the firmness of binding of the electrons in the outer groups in
+the elements of the family of the rare earths shows a dependence
+on the atomic number which strongly supports the assumption that
+in these elements a completion of an inner group of $4$-quanta
+orbits takes place. For details the reader is referred to Coster's
+paper in the \Title{Philosophical Magazine}. Another important contribution
+to our systematic knowledge of the X-ray spectra is
+contained in a recent paper by Wentzel. He shows that various
+lines, which find no place in the classification hitherto considered,
+can be ascribed in a natural manner to processes of reorganization,
+initiated by the removal of more than one electron from the
+atom; these lines are therefore in a certain sense analogous to
+the enhanced lines in the optical spectra.
+
+\Chapter{}{Conclusion}
+
+Before bringing this address to a close I wish once more to
+emphasize the complete analogy in the application of the
+quantum theory to the stability of the atom, used in explaining
+two so different phenomena as the periodic system and X-ray
+spectra. This point is of the greatest importance in judging the
+reality of the theory, since the justification for employing considerations,
+relating to the formation of atoms by successive capture
+of electrons, as a guiding principle for the investigation of atomic
+\PageSep{126}
+structure might appear doubtful if such considerations could not
+be brought into natural agreement with views on the reorganization
+of the atom after a disturbance in the normal electronic
+arrangement. Even though a certain inner consistency in this
+view of atomic structure will be recognized, it is, however, hardly
+necessary for me to emphasize the incomplete character of the
+theory, not only as regards the elaboration of details, but also so
+far as the foundation of the general points of view is concerned.
+There seems, however, to be no other way of advance in atomic
+problems than that which hitherto has been followed, namely to let
+the work in these two directions go hand in hand.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% GUTENBERG LICENSE %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\PGLicense
+\begin{PGtext}
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Theory of Spectra and Atomic
+Constitution, by Niels (Niels Henrik David) Bohr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THEORY OF SPECTRA ***
+
+***** This file should be named 47464-pdf.pdf or 47464-pdf.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/4/7/4/6/47464/
+
+Produced by Andrew D. Hwang
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
+ www.gutenberg.org/license.
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809
+North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email
+contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the
+Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+\end{PGtext}
+
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %
+% %
+% End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Theory of Spectra and Atomic %
+% Constitution, by Niels (Niels Henrik David) Bohr %
+% %
+% *** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THEORY OF SPECTRA *** %
+% %
+% ***** This file should be named 47464-t.tex or 47464-t.zip ***** %
+% This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: %
+% http://www.gutenberg.org/4/7/4/6/47464/ %
+% %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %
+
+\end{document}
+###
+@ControlwordReplace = (
+ ['\\ie', 'i.e.']
+ );
+
+@ControlwordArguments = (
+ ['\\Signature', 1, 1, '', ' ', 1, 1, '', ' ', 1, 1, '', ' ', 1, 1, '', ''],
+ ['\\Figure', 0, 0, '', '', 1, 0, '', '', 1, 0, '<GRAPHIC>', ''],
+ ['\\BookMark', 1, 0, '', '', 1, 0, '', ''],
+ ['\\First', 1, 1, '', ''],
+ ['\\Essay', 1, 1, 'Essay ', ' ', 1, 1, '', '', 1, 0, '', ''],
+ ['\\Chapter', 1, 1, '', ' ', 1, 1, '', ''],
+ ['\\Section', 1, 1, '', ''],
+ ['\\Fig', 0, 0, '', '', 1, 1, 'figure ', ''],
+ ['\\FigNum', 1, 1, '', ''],
+ ['\\Pagelabel', 1, 0, '', ''],
+ ['\\PageRef', 1, 1, 'p. ', ''],
+ ['\\PageNum', 1, 1, '', ''],
+ ['\\Eq', 0, 0, '', '', 1, 1, '', ''],
+ ['\\Add', 1, 1, '', ''],
+ ['\\Chg', 1, 0, '', '', 1, 1, '', '']
+ );
+$PageSeparator = qr/^\\PageSep/;
+$CustomClean = 'print "\\nCustom cleaning in progress...";
+my $cline = 0;
+ while ($cline <= $#file) {
+ $file[$cline] =~ s/--------[^\n]*\n//; # strip page separators
+ $cline++
+ }
+ print "done\\n";';
+###
+This is pdfTeX, Version 3.1415926-2.5-1.40.14 (TeX Live 2013/Debian) (format=pdflatex 2014.9.6) 26 NOV 2014 07:10
+entering extended mode
+ %&-line parsing enabled.
+**47464-t.tex
+(./47464-t.tex
+LaTeX2e <2011/06/27>
+Babel <3.9h> and hyphenation patterns for 78 languages loaded.
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/book.cls
+Document Class: book 2007/10/19 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/bk12.clo
+File: bk12.clo 2007/10/19 v1.4h Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+)
+\c@part=\count79
+\c@chapter=\count80
+\c@section=\count81
+\c@subsection=\count82
+\c@subsubsection=\count83
+\c@paragraph=\count84
+\c@subparagraph=\count85
+\c@figure=\count86
+\c@table=\count87
+\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
+\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
+\bibindent=\dimen102
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/inputenc.sty
+Package: inputenc 2008/03/30 v1.1d Input encoding file
+\inpenc@prehook=\toks14
+\inpenc@posthook=\toks15
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/latin1.def
+File: latin1.def 2008/03/30 v1.1d Input encoding file
+)) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/ifthen.sty
+Package: ifthen 2001/05/26 v1.1c Standard LaTeX ifthen package (DPC)
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amsmath.sty
+Package: amsmath 2013/01/14 v2.14 AMS math features
+\@mathmargin=\skip43
+For additional information on amsmath, use the `?' option.
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amstext.sty
+Package: amstext 2000/06/29 v2.01
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amsgen.sty
+File: amsgen.sty 1999/11/30 v2.0
+\@emptytoks=\toks16
+\ex@=\dimen103
+)) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amsbsy.sty
+Package: amsbsy 1999/11/29 v1.2d
+\pmbraise@=\dimen104
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsmath/amsopn.sty
+Package: amsopn 1999/12/14 v2.01 operator names
+)
+\inf@bad=\count88
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 210.
+\uproot@=\count89
+\leftroot@=\count90
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \overline on input line 306.
+\classnum@=\count91
+\DOTSCASE@=\count92
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 378.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 381.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 466.
+\Mathstrutbox@=\box26
+\strutbox@=\box27
+\big@size=\dimen105
+LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 566.
+LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 567.
+\macc@depth=\count93
+\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count94
+\dotsspace@=\muskip10
+\c@parentequation=\count95
+\dspbrk@lvl=\count96
+\tag@help=\toks17
+\row@=\count97
+\column@=\count98
+\maxfields@=\count99
+\andhelp@=\toks18
+\eqnshift@=\dimen106
+\alignsep@=\dimen107
+\tagshift@=\dimen108
+\tagwidth@=\dimen109
+\totwidth@=\dimen110
+\lineht@=\dimen111
+\@envbody=\toks19
+\multlinegap=\skip44
+\multlinetaggap=\skip45
+\mathdisplay@stack=\toks20
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \[ on input line 2665.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \] on input line 2666.
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsfonts/amssymb.sty
+Package: amssymb 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS font symbols
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsfonts/amsfonts.sty
+Package: amsfonts 2013/01/14 v3.01 Basic AMSFonts support
+\symAMSa=\mathgroup4
+\symAMSb=\mathgroup5
+LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting math alphabet `\mathfrak' in version `bold'
+(Font) U/euf/m/n --> U/euf/b/n on input line 106.
+)) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/alltt.sty
+Package: alltt 1997/06/16 v2.0g defines alltt environment
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/tools/indentfirst.sty
+Package: indentfirst 1995/11/23 v1.03 Indent first paragraph (DPC)
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/tools/array.sty
+Package: array 2008/09/09 v2.4c Tabular extension package (FMi)
+\col@sep=\dimen112
+\extrarowheight=\dimen113
+\NC@list=\toks21
+\extratabsurround=\skip46
+\backup@length=\skip47
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/footmisc/footmisc.sty
+Package: footmisc 2011/06/06 v5.5b a miscellany of footnote facilities
+\FN@temptoken=\toks22
+\footnotemargin=\dimen114
+\c@pp@next@reset=\count100
+\c@@fnserial=\count101
+Package footmisc Info: Declaring symbol style bringhurst on input line 855.
+Package footmisc Info: Declaring symbol style chicago on input line 863.
+Package footmisc Info: Declaring symbol style wiley on input line 872.
+Package footmisc Info: Declaring symbol style lamport-robust on input line 883.
+
+Package footmisc Info: Declaring symbol style lamport* on input line 903.
+Package footmisc Info: Declaring symbol style lamport*-robust on input line 924
+.
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/graphicx.sty
+Package: graphicx 1999/02/16 v1.0f Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/keyval.sty
+Package: keyval 1999/03/16 v1.13 key=value parser (DPC)
+\KV@toks@=\toks23
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/graphics.sty
+Package: graphics 2009/02/05 v1.0o Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/trig.sty
+Package: trig 1999/03/16 v1.09 sin cos tan (DPC)
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/latexconfig/graphics.cfg
+File: graphics.cfg 2010/04/23 v1.9 graphics configuration of TeX Live
+)
+Package graphics Info: Driver file: pdftex.def on input line 91.
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/pdftex-def/pdftex.def
+File: pdftex.def 2011/05/27 v0.06d Graphics/color for pdfTeX
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/generic/oberdiek/infwarerr.sty
+Package: infwarerr 2010/04/08 v1.3 Providing info/warning/error messages (HO)
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/generic/oberdiek/ltxcmds.sty
+Package: ltxcmds 2011/11/09 v1.22 LaTeX kernel commands for general use (HO)
+)
+\Gread@gobject=\count102
+))
+\Gin@req@height=\dimen115
+\Gin@req@width=\dimen116
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/tools/calc.sty
+Package: calc 2007/08/22 v4.3 Infix arithmetic (KKT,FJ)
+\calc@Acount=\count103
+\calc@Bcount=\count104
+\calc@Adimen=\dimen117
+\calc@Bdimen=\dimen118
+\calc@Askip=\skip48
+\calc@Bskip=\skip49
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \setlength on input line 76.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \addtolength on input line 77.
+\calc@Ccount=\count105
+\calc@Cskip=\skip50
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.sty
+\fancy@headwidth=\skip51
+\f@ncyO@elh=\skip52
+\f@ncyO@erh=\skip53
+\f@ncyO@olh=\skip54
+\f@ncyO@orh=\skip55
+\f@ncyO@elf=\skip56
+\f@ncyO@erf=\skip57
+\f@ncyO@olf=\skip58
+\f@ncyO@orf=\skip59
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geometry/geometry.sty
+Package: geometry 2010/09/12 v5.6 Page Geometry
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/generic/oberdiek/ifpdf.sty
+Package: ifpdf 2011/01/30 v2.3 Provides the ifpdf switch (HO)
+Package ifpdf Info: pdfTeX in PDF mode is detected.
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/generic/oberdiek/ifvtex.sty
+Package: ifvtex 2010/03/01 v1.5 Detect VTeX and its facilities (HO)
+Package ifvtex Info: VTeX not detected.
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/generic/ifxetex/ifxetex.sty
+Package: ifxetex 2010/09/12 v0.6 Provides ifxetex conditional
+)
+\Gm@cnth=\count106
+\Gm@cntv=\count107
+\c@Gm@tempcnt=\count108
+\Gm@bindingoffset=\dimen119
+\Gm@wd@mp=\dimen120
+\Gm@odd@mp=\dimen121
+\Gm@even@mp=\dimen122
+\Gm@layoutwidth=\dimen123
+\Gm@layoutheight=\dimen124
+\Gm@layouthoffset=\dimen125
+\Gm@layoutvoffset=\dimen126
+\Gm@dimlist=\toks24
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hyperref.sty
+Package: hyperref 2012/11/06 v6.83m Hypertext links for LaTeX
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/generic/oberdiek/hobsub-hyperref.sty
+Package: hobsub-hyperref 2012/05/28 v1.13 Bundle oberdiek, subset hyperref (HO)
+
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/generic/oberdiek/hobsub-generic.sty
+Package: hobsub-generic 2012/05/28 v1.13 Bundle oberdiek, subset generic (HO)
+Package: hobsub 2012/05/28 v1.13 Construct package bundles (HO)
+Package hobsub Info: Skipping package `infwarerr' (already loaded).
+Package hobsub Info: Skipping package `ltxcmds' (already loaded).
+Package: ifluatex 2010/03/01 v1.3 Provides the ifluatex switch (HO)
+Package ifluatex Info: LuaTeX not detected.
+Package hobsub Info: Skipping package `ifvtex' (already loaded).
+Package: intcalc 2007/09/27 v1.1 Expandable calculations with integers (HO)
+Package hobsub Info: Skipping package `ifpdf' (already loaded).
+Package: etexcmds 2011/02/16 v1.5 Avoid name clashes with e-TeX commands (HO)
+Package etexcmds Info: Could not find \expanded.
+(etexcmds) That can mean that you are not using pdfTeX 1.50 or
+(etexcmds) that some package has redefined \expanded.
+(etexcmds) In the latter case, load this package earlier.
+Package: kvsetkeys 2012/04/25 v1.16 Key value parser (HO)
+Package: kvdefinekeys 2011/04/07 v1.3 Define keys (HO)
+Package: pdftexcmds 2011/11/29 v0.20 Utility functions of pdfTeX for LuaTeX (HO
+)
+Package pdftexcmds Info: LuaTeX not detected.
+Package pdftexcmds Info: \pdf@primitive is available.
+Package pdftexcmds Info: \pdf@ifprimitive is available.
+Package pdftexcmds Info: \pdfdraftmode found.
+Package: pdfescape 2011/11/25 v1.13 Implements pdfTeX's escape features (HO)
+Package: bigintcalc 2012/04/08 v1.3 Expandable calculations on big integers (HO
+)
+Package: bitset 2011/01/30 v1.1 Handle bit-vector datatype (HO)
+Package: uniquecounter 2011/01/30 v1.2 Provide unlimited unique counter (HO)
+)
+Package hobsub Info: Skipping package `hobsub' (already loaded).
+Package: letltxmacro 2010/09/02 v1.4 Let assignment for LaTeX macros (HO)
+Package: hopatch 2012/05/28 v1.2 Wrapper for package hooks (HO)
+Package: xcolor-patch 2011/01/30 xcolor patch
+Package: atveryend 2011/06/30 v1.8 Hooks at the very end of document (HO)
+Package atveryend Info: \enddocument detected (standard20110627).
+Package: atbegshi 2011/10/05 v1.16 At begin shipout hook (HO)
+Package: refcount 2011/10/16 v3.4 Data extraction from label references (HO)
+Package: hycolor 2011/01/30 v1.7 Color options for hyperref/bookmark (HO)
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/oberdiek/auxhook.sty
+Package: auxhook 2011/03/04 v1.3 Hooks for auxiliary files (HO)
+) (/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/oberdiek/kvoptions.sty
+Package: kvoptions 2011/06/30 v3.11 Key value format for package options (HO)
+)
+\@linkdim=\dimen127
+\Hy@linkcounter=\count109
+\Hy@pagecounter=\count110
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/pd1enc.def
+File: pd1enc.def 2012/11/06 v6.83m Hyperref: PDFDocEncoding definition (HO)
+)
+\Hy@SavedSpaceFactor=\count111
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/latexconfig/hyperref.cfg
+File: hyperref.cfg 2002/06/06 v1.2 hyperref configuration of TeXLive
+)
+Package hyperref Info: Option `hyperfootnotes' set `false' on input line 4319.
+Package hyperref Info: Option `bookmarks' set `true' on input line 4319.
+Package hyperref Info: Option `linktocpage' set `false' on input line 4319.
+Package hyperref Info: Option `pdfdisplaydoctitle' set `true' on input line 431
+9.
+Package hyperref Info: Option `pdfpagelabels' set `true' on input line 4319.
+Package hyperref Info: Option `bookmarksopen' set `true' on input line 4319.
+Package hyperref Info: Option `colorlinks' set `true' on input line 4319.
+Package hyperref Info: Hyper figures OFF on input line 4443.
+Package hyperref Info: Link nesting OFF on input line 4448.
+Package hyperref Info: Hyper index ON on input line 4451.
+Package hyperref Info: Plain pages OFF on input line 4458.
+Package hyperref Info: Backreferencing OFF on input line 4463.
+Package hyperref Info: Implicit mode ON; LaTeX internals redefined.
+Package hyperref Info: Bookmarks ON on input line 4688.
+\c@Hy@tempcnt=\count112
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/url/url.sty
+\Urlmuskip=\muskip11
+Package: url 2013/09/16 ver 3.4 Verb mode for urls, etc.
+)
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \url on input line 5041.
+\XeTeXLinkMargin=\dimen128
+\Fld@menulength=\count113
+\Field@Width=\dimen129
+\Fld@charsize=\dimen130
+Package hyperref Info: Hyper figures OFF on input line 6295.
+Package hyperref Info: Link nesting OFF on input line 6300.
+Package hyperref Info: Hyper index ON on input line 6303.
+Package hyperref Info: backreferencing OFF on input line 6310.
+Package hyperref Info: Link coloring ON on input line 6313.
+Package hyperref Info: Link coloring with OCG OFF on input line 6320.
+Package hyperref Info: PDF/A mode OFF on input line 6325.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \ref on input line 6365.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \pageref on input line 6369.
+\Hy@abspage=\count114
+\c@Item=\count115
+)
+
+Package hyperref Message: Driver: hpdftex.
+
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/hpdftex.def
+File: hpdftex.def 2012/11/06 v6.83m Hyperref driver for pdfTeX
+\Fld@listcount=\count116
+\c@bookmark@seq@number=\count117
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/oberdiek/rerunfilecheck.sty
+Package: rerunfilecheck 2011/04/15 v1.7 Rerun checks for auxiliary files (HO)
+Package uniquecounter Info: New unique counter `rerunfilecheck' on input line 2
+82.
+)
+\Hy@SectionHShift=\skip60
+)
+\TmpLen=\skip61
+\c@SecNo=\count118
+(./47464-t.aux)
+\openout1 = `47464-t.aux'.
+
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for PD1/pdf/m/n on input line 465.
+LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 465.
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/context/base/supp-pdf.mkii
+[Loading MPS to PDF converter (version 2006.09.02).]
+\scratchcounter=\count119
+\scratchdimen=\dimen131
+\scratchbox=\box28
+\nofMPsegments=\count120
+\nofMParguments=\count121
+\everyMPshowfont=\toks25
+\MPscratchCnt=\count122
+\MPscratchDim=\dimen132
+\MPnumerator=\count123
+\makeMPintoPDFobject=\count124
+\everyMPtoPDFconversion=\toks26
+)
+*geometry* driver: auto-detecting
+*geometry* detected driver: pdftex
+*geometry* verbose mode - [ preamble ] result:
+* driver: pdftex
+* paper: <default>
+* layout: <same size as paper>
+* layoutoffset:(h,v)=(0.0pt,0.0pt)
+* hratio: 1:1
+* modes: includehead includefoot twoside
+* h-part:(L,W,R)=(9.03375pt, 307.14749pt, 9.03375pt)
+* v-part:(T,H,B)=(1.26749pt, 466.58623pt, 1.90128pt)
+* \paperwidth=325.215pt
+* \paperheight=469.75499pt
+* \textwidth=307.14749pt
+* \textheight=404.71243pt
+* \oddsidemargin=-63.23624pt
+* \evensidemargin=-63.23624pt
+* \topmargin=-71.0025pt
+* \headheight=12.0pt
+* \headsep=19.8738pt
+* \topskip=12.0pt
+* \footskip=30.0pt
+* \marginparwidth=98.0pt
+* \marginparsep=7.0pt
+* \columnsep=10.0pt
+* \skip\footins=10.8pt plus 4.0pt minus 2.0pt
+* \hoffset=0.0pt
+* \voffset=0.0pt
+* \mag=1000
+* \@twocolumnfalse
+* \@twosidetrue
+* \@mparswitchtrue
+* \@reversemarginfalse
+* (1in=72.27pt=25.4mm, 1cm=28.453pt)
+
+\AtBeginShipoutBox=\box29
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/graphics/color.sty
+Package: color 2005/11/14 v1.0j Standard LaTeX Color (DPC)
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/latexconfig/color.cfg
+File: color.cfg 2007/01/18 v1.5 color configuration of teTeX/TeXLive
+)
+Package color Info: Driver file: pdftex.def on input line 130.
+)
+Package hyperref Info: Link coloring ON on input line 465.
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/hyperref/nameref.sty
+Package: nameref 2012/10/27 v2.43 Cross-referencing by name of section
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/generic/oberdiek/gettitlestring.sty
+Package: gettitlestring 2010/12/03 v1.4 Cleanup title references (HO)
+)
+\c@section@level=\count125
+)
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \ref on input line 465.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \pageref on input line 465.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \nameref on input line 465.
+(./47464-t.out) (./47464-t.out)
+\@outlinefile=\write3
+\openout3 = `47464-t.out'.
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (7.35703pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 475--475
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/8 This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United St
+ates and most[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (7.35703pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 477--477
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/8 whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under
+ the terms of[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (15.85715pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 479--479
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/8 www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United Stat
+es, you'll have[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (28.60733pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 480--480
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/8 to check the laws of the country where you are located before
+ using this ebook.[]
+ []
+
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msa on input line 497.
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsfonts/umsa.fd
+File: umsa.fd 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS symbols A
+)
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msb on input line 497.
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/amsfonts/umsb.fd
+File: umsb.fd 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS symbols B
+) [1
+
+{/var/lib/texmf/fonts/map/pdftex/updmap/pdftex.map}] [2] [3] [1
+
+
+
+
+] [2]
+LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 664.
+
+(/usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/tex/latex/base/omscmr.fd
+File: omscmr.fd 1999/05/25 v2.5h Standard LaTeX font definitions
+)
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <8> not available
+(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 664.
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <7> not available
+(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 664.
+[3] [4] (./47464-t.toc
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1917) in paragraph at lines 18--18
+[][]| \OT1/cmr/m/sc/10.95 De-vel-op-ment of the Quan-tum The-ory of
+ []
+
+[5
+
+
+
+])
+\tf@toc=\write4
+\openout4 = `47464-t.toc'.
+
+[6] [7] [8]
+LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <12> not available
+(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 788.
+[1
+
+
+
+
+
+] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18]
+[19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30
+
+
+] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [38] [39] [40] [41] [42] [43] [44] <./imag
+es/fig_p30.pdf, id=538, 154.17601pt x 62.8749pt>
+File: ./images/fig_p30.pdf Graphic file (type pdf)
+<use ./images/fig_p30.pdf>
+Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/fig_p30.pdf used on input line 2042.
+(pdftex.def) Requested size: 291.78917pt x 119.00972pt.
+[45] [46 <./images/fig_p30.pdf>] [47] [48] [49] [50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [
+56] [57] [58] [59] [60] [61] [62] [63] [64] [65] [66] [67] [68] [69] [70] [71]
+[72] [73] [74] [75] [76] [77] [78] [79] [80] [81] [82] [83] [84] [85] [86] [87]
+[88] [89] [90] [91] [92
+
+
+] [93] [94] [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] [100] [101] [102] [103] [104] <./images/fi
+g_p70.pdf, id=936, 154.17601pt x 157.5486pt>
+File: ./images/fig_p70.pdf Graphic file (type pdf)
+<use ./images/fig_p70.pdf>
+Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/fig_p70.pdf used on input line 3686.
+(pdftex.def) Requested size: 291.78917pt x 298.20833pt.
+[105] [106 <./images/fig_p70.pdf>] [107] [108] [109] [110] [111] [112] [113] [1
+14] [115] [116] [117] <./images/fig_p79.pdf, id=1023, 154.17601pt x 62.8749pt>
+File: ./images/fig_p79.pdf Graphic file (type pdf)
+<use ./images/fig_p79.pdf>
+Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/fig_p79.pdf used on input line 4026.
+(pdftex.def) Requested size: 291.78917pt x 119.00972pt.
+[118] [119 <./images/fig_p79.pdf>] [120] [121] [122] [123] [124] [125] [126] [1
+27] [128] [129] [130] [131] [132] [133] [134] [135] [136] [137] [138] [139] [14
+0] [141] [142] [143] <./images/fig_p97.pdf, id=1170, 154.17601pt x 64.3203pt>
+File: ./images/fig_p97.pdf Graphic file (type pdf)
+<use ./images/fig_p97.pdf>
+Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/fig_p97.pdf used on input line 4747.
+(pdftex.def) Requested size: 291.78917pt x 121.74559pt.
+[144] [145] [146 <./images/fig_p97.pdf>] [147] [148] [149] [150]
+Underfull \hbox (badness 1292) in paragraph at lines 4867--4888
+ [][]\OT1/cmr/bx/n/12 Fourth Pe-riod. Potassium---Krypton. \OT1/cmr/m/n/12 In t
+he
+ []
+
+<./images/fig_p102.pdf, id=1215, 154.17601pt x 133.2177pt>
+File: ./images/fig_p102.pdf Graphic file (type pdf)
+<use ./images/fig_p102.pdf>
+Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/fig_p102.pdf used on input line 4930.
+(pdftex.def) Requested size: 291.78917pt x 252.15475pt.
+[151] [152] [153] [154 <./images/fig_p102.pdf>] [155] [156] [157] [158] [159] [
+160] [161] [162] [163] [164] [165] [166] [167] [168] [169] <./images/fig_p113.p
+df, id=1314, 154.17601pt x 69.6201pt>
+File: ./images/fig_p113.pdf Graphic file (type pdf)
+<use ./images/fig_p113.pdf>
+Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/fig_p113.pdf used on input line 5354.
+(pdftex.def) Requested size: 291.78917pt x 131.77707pt.
+[170 <./images/fig_p113.pdf>] [171] [172] [173] [174] [175] [176] [177] [178] [
+179] [180] [181] [182] [183] <./images/fig_p123.pdf, id=1395, 154.17601pt x 137
+.5539pt>
+File: ./images/fig_p123.pdf Graphic file (type pdf)
+<use ./images/fig_p123.pdf>
+Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/fig_p123.pdf used on input line 5741.
+(pdftex.def) Requested size: 291.78917pt x 260.3623pt.
+[184] [185 <./images/fig_p123.pdf>] <./images/fig_p124.pdf, id=1420, 154.17601p
+t x 93.951pt>
+File: ./images/fig_p124.pdf Graphic file (type pdf)
+<use ./images/fig_p124.pdf>
+Package pdftex.def Info: ./images/fig_p124.pdf used on input line 5764.
+(pdftex.def) Requested size: 291.78917pt x 177.83067pt.
+[186 <./images/fig_p124.pdf>] [187] [188] [189] [1
+
+
+]
+Overfull \hbox (3.10696pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5902--5902
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/8 1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
+ Foundation"[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (3.10696pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5907--5907
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/8 located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prev
+ent you from[]
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (3.10696pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5912--5912
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/8 freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with
+the terms of[]
+ []
+
+[2] [3]
+Overfull \hbox (3.10696pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5975--5975
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/8 posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gut
+enberg.org),[]
+ []
+
+[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
+Package atveryend Info: Empty hook `BeforeClearDocument' on input line 6204.
+[9]
+Package atveryend Info: Empty hook `AfterLastShipout' on input line 6204.
+(./47464-t.aux)
+Package atveryend Info: Executing hook `AtVeryEndDocument' on input line 6204.
+
+ *File List*
+ book.cls 2007/10/19 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class
+ bk12.clo 2007/10/19 v1.4h Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+inputenc.sty 2008/03/30 v1.1d Input encoding file
+ latin1.def 2008/03/30 v1.1d Input encoding file
+ ifthen.sty 2001/05/26 v1.1c Standard LaTeX ifthen package (DPC)
+ amsmath.sty 2013/01/14 v2.14 AMS math features
+ amstext.sty 2000/06/29 v2.01
+ amsgen.sty 1999/11/30 v2.0
+ amsbsy.sty 1999/11/29 v1.2d
+ amsopn.sty 1999/12/14 v2.01 operator names
+ amssymb.sty 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS font symbols
+amsfonts.sty 2013/01/14 v3.01 Basic AMSFonts support
+ alltt.sty 1997/06/16 v2.0g defines alltt environment
+indentfirst.sty 1995/11/23 v1.03 Indent first paragraph (DPC)
+ array.sty 2008/09/09 v2.4c Tabular extension package (FMi)
+footmisc.sty 2011/06/06 v5.5b a miscellany of footnote facilities
+graphicx.sty 1999/02/16 v1.0f Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ keyval.sty 1999/03/16 v1.13 key=value parser (DPC)
+graphics.sty 2009/02/05 v1.0o Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+ trig.sty 1999/03/16 v1.09 sin cos tan (DPC)
+graphics.cfg 2010/04/23 v1.9 graphics configuration of TeX Live
+ pdftex.def 2011/05/27 v0.06d Graphics/color for pdfTeX
+infwarerr.sty 2010/04/08 v1.3 Providing info/warning/error messages (HO)
+ ltxcmds.sty 2011/11/09 v1.22 LaTeX kernel commands for general use (HO)
+ calc.sty 2007/08/22 v4.3 Infix arithmetic (KKT,FJ)
+fancyhdr.sty
+geometry.sty 2010/09/12 v5.6 Page Geometry
+ ifpdf.sty 2011/01/30 v2.3 Provides the ifpdf switch (HO)
+ ifvtex.sty 2010/03/01 v1.5 Detect VTeX and its facilities (HO)
+ ifxetex.sty 2010/09/12 v0.6 Provides ifxetex conditional
+hyperref.sty 2012/11/06 v6.83m Hypertext links for LaTeX
+hobsub-hyperref.sty 2012/05/28 v1.13 Bundle oberdiek, subset hyperref (HO)
+hobsub-generic.sty 2012/05/28 v1.13 Bundle oberdiek, subset generic (HO)
+ hobsub.sty 2012/05/28 v1.13 Construct package bundles (HO)
+ifluatex.sty 2010/03/01 v1.3 Provides the ifluatex switch (HO)
+ intcalc.sty 2007/09/27 v1.1 Expandable calculations with integers (HO)
+etexcmds.sty 2011/02/16 v1.5 Avoid name clashes with e-TeX commands (HO)
+kvsetkeys.sty 2012/04/25 v1.16 Key value parser (HO)
+kvdefinekeys.sty 2011/04/07 v1.3 Define keys (HO)
+pdftexcmds.sty 2011/11/29 v0.20 Utility functions of pdfTeX for LuaTeX (HO)
+pdfescape.sty 2011/11/25 v1.13 Implements pdfTeX's escape features (HO)
+bigintcalc.sty 2012/04/08 v1.3 Expandable calculations on big integers (HO)
+ bitset.sty 2011/01/30 v1.1 Handle bit-vector datatype (HO)
+uniquecounter.sty 2011/01/30 v1.2 Provide unlimited unique counter (HO)
+letltxmacro.sty 2010/09/02 v1.4 Let assignment for LaTeX macros (HO)
+ hopatch.sty 2012/05/28 v1.2 Wrapper for package hooks (HO)
+xcolor-patch.sty 2011/01/30 xcolor patch
+atveryend.sty 2011/06/30 v1.8 Hooks at the very end of document (HO)
+atbegshi.sty 2011/10/05 v1.16 At begin shipout hook (HO)
+refcount.sty 2011/10/16 v3.4 Data extraction from label references (HO)
+ hycolor.sty 2011/01/30 v1.7 Color options for hyperref/bookmark (HO)
+ auxhook.sty 2011/03/04 v1.3 Hooks for auxiliary files (HO)
+kvoptions.sty 2011/06/30 v3.11 Key value format for package options (HO)
+ pd1enc.def 2012/11/06 v6.83m Hyperref: PDFDocEncoding definition (HO)
+hyperref.cfg 2002/06/06 v1.2 hyperref configuration of TeXLive
+ url.sty 2013/09/16 ver 3.4 Verb mode for urls, etc.
+ hpdftex.def 2012/11/06 v6.83m Hyperref driver for pdfTeX
+rerunfilecheck.sty 2011/04/15 v1.7 Rerun checks for auxiliary files (HO)
+supp-pdf.mkii
+ color.sty 2005/11/14 v1.0j Standard LaTeX Color (DPC)
+ color.cfg 2007/01/18 v1.5 color configuration of teTeX/TeXLive
+ nameref.sty 2012/10/27 v2.43 Cross-referencing by name of section
+gettitlestring.sty 2010/12/03 v1.4 Cleanup title references (HO)
+ 47464-t.out
+ 47464-t.out
+ umsa.fd 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS symbols A
+ umsb.fd 2013/01/14 v3.01 AMS symbols B
+ omscmr.fd 1999/05/25 v2.5h Standard LaTeX font definitions
+./images/fig_p30.pdf
+./images/fig_p70.pdf
+./images/fig_p79.pdf
+./images/fig_p97.pdf
+./images/fig_p102.pdf
+./images/fig_p113.pdf
+./images/fig_p123.pdf
+./images/fig_p124.pdf
+ ***********
+
+Package atveryend Info: Executing hook `AtEndAfterFileList' on input line 6204.
+
+Package rerunfilecheck Info: File `47464-t.out' has not changed.
+(rerunfilecheck) Checksum: 941BAAB177EAA6E2EBF87B376707898A;1582.
+Package atveryend Info: Empty hook `AtVeryVeryEnd' on input line 6204.
+ )
+Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
+ 7604 strings out of 493304
+ 106244 string characters out of 6139872
+ 214221 words of memory out of 5000000
+ 10478 multiletter control sequences out of 15000+600000
+ 17658 words of font info for 68 fonts, out of 8000000 for 9000
+ 959 hyphenation exceptions out of 8191
+ 28i,12n,44p,345b,485s stack positions out of 5000i,500n,10000p,200000b,80000s
+</usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmbx12.pfb></us
+r/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmcsc10.pfb></usr/sha
+re/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmex10.pfb></usr/share/tex
+live/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmmi12.pfb></usr/share/texlive/t
+exmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmmi8.pfb></usr/share/texlive/texmf-di
+st/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmr10.pfb></usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/font
+s/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmr12.pfb></usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1
+/public/amsfonts/cm/cmr17.pfb></usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public
+/amsfonts/cm/cmr8.pfb></usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfont
+s/cm/cmsy10.pfb></usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/c
+msy6.pfb></usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmsy7.pf
+b></usr/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmsy8.pfb></usr
+/share/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmti10.pfb></usr/share
+/texlive/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmti12.pfb></usr/share/texli
+ve/texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmtt10.pfb></usr/share/texlive/tex
+mf-dist/fonts/type1/public/amsfonts/cm/cmtt8.pfb>
+Output written on 47464-t.pdf (209 pages, 1116135 bytes).
+PDF statistics:
+ 1651 PDF objects out of 1728 (max. 8388607)
+ 1379 compressed objects within 14 object streams
+ 479 named destinations out of 1000 (max. 500000)
+ 193 words of extra memory for PDF output out of 10000 (max. 10000000)
+